Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Imperial Tutorials
April 2007
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk
Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil
3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer,
Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up
Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical
Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream,
ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual
Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual
Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.
Portions of this computer program are copyright 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No.
5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
OSTN97 Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
OSTN02 Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
OSGM02 Crown copyright 2002, Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Part 1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . .
Performing Common Tasks as You Work in
Part 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Part 3
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
View .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 114
. 114
. 117
. 124
. 129
. 133
. 133
. 136
. 139
. 140
. 143
. 148
. 148
. 151
. 155
Contents | v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 162
. 162
. 167
. 171
. 174
. 174
. 179
. 181
. 183
. 185
. 191
. 194
. 196
. 197
. 198
. 201
. 205
. 205
. 207
. 207
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 210
. 210
. 214
. 214
. 221
. 222
. 227
. 230
. 230
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 238
. 238
. 245
. 248
. 250
. 252
. 254
. 258
. 259
. 259
. 260
. 262
vi | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 278
. 278
. 283
. 283
. 284
. 284
. 287
. 293
. 293
. 295
. 297
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 298
. 299
. 299
. 300
. 301
Part 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 324
. 324
. 327
. 333
. 335
. 337
. 338
. 339
. 341
. 341
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 348
. 348
. 352
. 354
. 357
. 360
. 360
. 362
. 366
. 367
. 369
. 369
. 372
. 374
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 378
. 378
. 379
. 381
. 384
. 384
. 385
. 386
. 386
. 389
. 390
. 390
. 392
. 393
. 396
. 396
Contents | vii
Part 5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 401
. 403
. 405
. 409
. 409
. 411
. 413
. 414
. 417
. 419
. 423
. 425
. 432
. 432
. 439
. 443
Part 6
Creating
Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
viii | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 482
. 482
. 483
. 483
. 485
. 486
. 491
. 492
. 492
. 493
. 493
. 495
. 497
. 498
. 499
. 504
. 507
. 509
. 512
. 512
. 514
. 519
. 521
. 526
. 537
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 540
. 545
. 547
. 548
. 551
. 554
. 561
. 565
. 566
. 567
. 570
. 572
. 573
. 574
. 574
. 574
. 576
. 577
. 578
. 580
. 581
. 581
. 582
. 583
. 590
. 594
. 603
. 608
. 612
. 614
. 614
. 616
. 617
. 617
. 618
. 619
. 620
. 621
. 621
. 623
. 625
. 625
. 627
. 627
. 630
. 630
. 631
. 633
. 641
. 643
. 643
. 649
. 652
. 653
. 667
. 668
Contents | ix
Part 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 671
. 672
. 675
. 675
. 681
. 685
. 690
. 693
. 693
. 695
. 698
. 707
. 707
. 708
. 712
. 712
. 717
. 721
. 726
. 728
. 728
. 733
. 735
. 735
. 738
. 738
. 739
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 744
. 744
. 753
. 755
. 755
. 759
. 761
. 765
. 765
. 766
. 769
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 774
. 774
. 778
. 780
. 782
. 785
. 787
. 788
. 789
. 791
. 791
. 793
. 794
x | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 808
. 808
. 813
. 815
. 815
. 816
. 819
. 822
. 822
. 825
. 825
. 828
. 832
. 834
. 837
. 842
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 846
. 846
. 853
. 857
. 859
. 860
. 863
. 866
. 866
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 870
. 870
. 876
. 880
. 882
. 889
. 893
. 895
. 899
. 900
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 904
. 904
. 905
. 912
. 915
. 916
. 920
. 929
. 939
. 939
. 941
. 942
. 942
. 944
Contents | xi
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 950
. 950
. 953
. 957
. 961
. 965
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 970
. 970
. 980
. 986
Part 8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1003
. 1003
. 1011
. 1014
. 1017
. 1019
. 1020
. 1021
. 1024
. 1026
. 1027
xii | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1034
. 1034
. 1036
. 1038
. 1039
. 1041
. 1041
. 1045
. 1046
. 1048
. 1052
. 1055
. 1056
. 1058
. 1058
. 1059
. 1064
. 1066
. 1069
. 1070
. 1071
. 1073
Getting Started
Introduction
This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials
and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units.
Common file names have a c_ prefix.
Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for
more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files
location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included
in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used
to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used
with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.
Open a dataset
1 Click File menu Open.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the
next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and
use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.
6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:
For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you
save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.
For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.
Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template
contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial
projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary.
11 Select default.rte, and click Open.
12 Click OK.
The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move
the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the
relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional
characteristic.
The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or
roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation.
Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date.
Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and
modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in
Revit Architecture.
In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is
determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components.
Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other
cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.
Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All
elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation
elements.
A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building.
An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.
Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties),
identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some
or all properties, but the set of propertiestheir names and meaningis the same. For example, six-panel colonial
doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.
Families are either component families or system families:
Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the
set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or
creating as separate files.
Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For
example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls
with different compositions.
Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30 X 42 title block or
a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family
can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new
type within the same family.
Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building
(model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar
with the user interface.
By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level
1 floor plan view is the default open view.
TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.
The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View.
To choose commands, place the cursor over the menu name, and click. Then, click the command name
to start the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process.
These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu.
TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.
While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another
timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context
menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function
you are performing and what is currently selected.
The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.
There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar
represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn
the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to
resize and move each toolbar.
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays
a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the
components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.
The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are
10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by
selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.
11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components
Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the
project construction documents
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans
Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans
To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the
Design Bar.
TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab
from the context menu.
You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and
groups of your current project:
Right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups.
The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category
(doors, walls, windows), and group name. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name.
You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or
group to the project or add a view to a sheet.
The browser is dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser
title bar to a new location.
13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.
14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the bottom left corner of the window, notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you
should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."
TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The Status Bar also provides
information, in conjunction with Tooltips, regarding selected components within a view. When you place
the cursor over a component, it highlights and the status bar displays the component name.
TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view, use the Tab key to alternate
between nearby components.
19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area.
The elevation symbol consists of two parts, the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Make
sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. It highlights when the cursor is over it.
In the Status Bar, notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West.
20 Press TAB, and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol, Elevations:
Elevation: Elevation 3.
When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view, you can use the Status Bar
and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component.
Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can use this tri-pane, HTML
help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. There are several tools that
help you find information. You can select a topic on the Contents tab, find a keyword on the Index tab,
search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab, or save commonly used pages on the Favorites
tab. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command.
You can access Help in the following ways:
Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific to the
dialog box opens. If there is no Help button displayed, press F1 to get help on that dialog box.
Windows: From any window, press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.
Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays.
TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings Options menu.
Shortcut keys
Wheel mouse
In the following steps, you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands.
2 Click File menu Open.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Cohouse.rvt.
16 | Chapter 1 Introduction
NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.
7 Click Zoom To Fit, and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window.
8 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom; this is referred to as a
crossing selection.
10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel, you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically.
Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within
the view.
NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view, Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents
less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu Snaps.
11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view,
on the View toolbar, click
The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen.
In the Dynamic View dialog, click Zoom, and drag the cursor in the drawing area.
Without clicking in the dialog, press and hold CTRL, hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse
button on a wheel mouse), and drag the cursor.
18 | Chapter 1 Introduction
15 Click and drag the left control, moving the cursor to the left horizontally, to lengthen the wall.
16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.
Move an element
17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.
(Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require two clicks to complete the command. After selecting
the element to be moved, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again to specify the
ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.
19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.
21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant, and drag it
on top of the table.
Undo commands
22 On the Standard toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to
All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands
by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. In this example, you decide
that you like the table better where it was placed originally.
23 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
20 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. All commands are canceled up to and
including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or press and
hold CTRL and enter Z.
End a command
24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
Some commands, such as the Lines command, stay active or current until you choose another command
or end the current command.
25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.
26 To end the command, use one of the following methods:
22 | Chapter 1 Introduction
23
Creating a Building
Information Model
In this tutorial, you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in
Revit Architecture 2008. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors, a
curtain wall, a central service core, and a sloped roof over one corner of the
building.
As you develop the building design, you learn how to use parametric design
techniques. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your
model. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between
elements in the model. For example, a wall or a column can be constrained to
grid. If the grid moves, the wall or column will move with it.
When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other, it is good practice
to test the constraints, or flex the model by changing parameters. As you
complete the exercises in this tutorial, you learn how to constrain elements and
how to test the parametric relationships between them.
25
In views that display elevation markers, you design inside the elevation markers. Each marker corresponds
to an elevation view in the project: North, South, East, West. You can access these views by double-clicking
the elevation marker arrow, or by opening the view in the Project Browser.
10 In the Project Browser, notice the Legends, Schedules/Quantities, Sheets (all), Families, Groups, and Revit
Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).
As you design and document your building model, content and building model reports, such as schedules
and legends, will be accessible from the Project Browser.
You learn how the levels are locked, or constrained, to each other, so that when one level moves, the other levels move
and change with it. When you begin designing, you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls,
doors, and windows within the building model.
TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser, it is good practice to precede the
level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.
4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views.
5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans, notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views
are now named 00 Foundation.
6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height, enter -6', and press ENTER.
7 Double-click the Level 2 text, enter 01 Entry Level, and press ENTER.
8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.
9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height, enter 0', and press ENTER.
11 On the left side of the Project Browser, view the Design Bar.
The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default, not all the tabs are
visible. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab, which should display by default. If
it does not, place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar, right-click, and click Basics.
12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Level.
Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. This is the Options
Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the
Design Bar.
14 Click Plan View Types, verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected, and click OK.
When you add the new level, a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created.
15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line, and then move it up.
As you move the cursor, a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor
position.
16 Enter 12'-6'', and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line, 12'-6'' above 01 Entry Level.
17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels,
click to specify the endpoint of the level line, and press ESC.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 3, click Rename, and enter 02 Level.
19 Click OK.
20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view.
Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view.
21 In the Project Browser, verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well.
Next, you add another level, using a different option.
24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line, and move it slightly upward.
A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn, 12'-6'' above the 02 Level line.
25 Click to place the level line.
26 Rename the level 03 Level, and rename the corresponding views.
27 Press ESC, or on the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.
04 Level
05 Roof Garden
06 Roof
NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. If you create a level by copying it, the associated
floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.
31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only.
Notice that by moving the top level, all the levels move. The lock icon that displays indicates that the
levels are vertically constrained. If you select a level and click its lock, the levels are no longer constrained,
and you can move them independently. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before
you continue on to the next exercise.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Column Grid on page 32.
In the following exercise, you constrain the column heights to the roof level, so that if the roof elevation changes, the
column height changes as well. In a later exercise, you change the columns to round hollow steel columns.
Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line.
4 Draw the first vertical grid line:
In the lower left corner of the drawing area, specify a start point for the grid line.
Move the cursor up, until it is positioned under the top elevation marker, and specify the grid line
endpoint.
The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
Next, use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the
existing line.
6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line:
Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line, and then place the cursor on the grid line to display
the location of the second grid line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B, and click to place the line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C, and click to place the line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D, and click to place the line.
8 Press ESC.
On the upper left side of the grid, specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A.
Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E, and specify the grid line endpoint.
The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.
11 On the Design Bar, click Grid.
12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 25' and 15', add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid, as shown.
15 Starting with grid line A, select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble.
16 When you select the last vertical grid line, click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the
dimension.
17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing.
The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.
18 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.
The pins are hidden. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins.
25 Adjust the grid:
At the bottom endpoint of the grid line, click and drag the blue circular grip up, until it is closer to
grid line 5, and press ESC.
At the left endpoint of the grid line, click and drag the blue circular grip to the right, until it is closer
to grid line A, and press ESC.
If necessary, adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them.
(Grid Intersection).
31 Press ESC.
32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B, and unlock it.
33 While pressing CTRL, select grid line A.
34 On the Options Bar, click Activate Dimensions, and then select the dimension value between grid lines A
and B.
35 Enter 18', and press ENTER.
The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines.
37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. If it is unlocked, lock it.
Next, create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view
the columns as if you were walking toward them.
Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid, and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid
line to place the camera.
Move the cursor next to grid bubble A, and click to place the target point of the camera.
The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips
display.
42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns.
Adding Beams
In this exercise, you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to the 01
Entry Level floor plan, and then copy them to the subsequent levels.
Adding Beams | 37
When you finish adding beams, you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.
A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. The
view is currently set to Coarse, which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.
4 Click Medium.
5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
6 In the Type Selector, verify W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected.
7 On the Options Bar, click Grid.
8 While pressing CTRL, select each grid line.
The selected grid lines display as red.
9 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building to view all of the beams.
Adding Beams | 39
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Top Level, select 06 Roof, and click OK.
24 Press ESC.
The columns now extend to the top level of the building, 06 Roof.
25 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building, and if necessary, resize the view to see
the entire structure.
Adding Beams | 41
Adding Braces
In this exercise, you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. To better add the braces to the structure,
you create 8 framing elevation views.
6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view, so that you can see vertical
columns located on grid lines A and B.
7 On the Design Bar, click Brace.
8 In the Type Selector, verify W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected.
9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level, and when the endpoint snap displays,
click to specify the start point of the brace.
NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in
the building model. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them, but when placed the braces
are placed, visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays.
10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level, and click to specify the endpoint
of the brace.
Adding Braces | 43
11 Using the same technique, add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. After you add
the final brace, press ESC.
NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between
elements.
Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity
12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height, enter 59', and press ENTER.
The height of the roof lowers.
IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level, delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the
endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.
Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure
18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views, as shown in the 3D view below.
Adding Braces | 45
3 times to restore the locked dimension, grid size, and roof height.
Creating a Foundation
In this exercise, you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes
the building load to the ground.
Before you can add the pile caps, you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. You learn how to
access the families that are stored in libraries included with software, and how to load specific families into a project.
After you load the pile cap family, you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view, where you must adjust
the view range before you can view them.
Creating a Foundation | 47
In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
In the View Range dialog, under View Depth, for Level, select Unlimited.
Click OK twice.
13 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_update_structure.rvt.
View the building model with the new structural element types
21 On the View toolbar, click
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Floors on page 51.
Adding Floors
In this exercise, you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.
To create floors, you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. Some other Revit Architecture elements, such as roofs,
stairs, and railings are also created from sketches. In this exercise, you learn some different techniques that you can
use when sketching objects.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_floors.rvt.
Adding Floors | 51
Using a crossing window, sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.
The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important, as you resize it in the next steps.
3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge:
At the top left corner of the grid, select the top floor line, and then the 1st horizontal grid line.
Move the cursor to the left, past the first vertical grid line, and click above the 1st horizontal grid line
to place the dimension.
Leave this dimension unlocked. If the grid changes size, the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it.
4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension.
5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions.
At the top left corner of the grid, select the top floor line.
Move the cursor to the right dimension, and click the temporary dimension value.
Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 1'.
Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid, and change their values to 1'.
The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it, this is
how you would do it.
9 Because you do not need to modify the floor, on the Design Bar, click Quit Sketch.
Next, you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model, using a different sketching technique.
You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.
Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line, and move the cursor until the dashed green line
displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor.
IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.
The 02 Level floor sketch displays.
Adding Floors | 53
12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown,
and lock the dimensions.
13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid.
14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The 02 Level floor displays.
Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level
26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor.
28 Click Edit menu Copy to Clipboard.
29 Click Edit menu Paste Aligned Select Levels by Name.
30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.
31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden.
The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level.
32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit.
33 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.
Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the
grid.
34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the
grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors.
35 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Adding Floors | 55
42 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the grid.
44 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 00 Foundation, and lock the dimension that you
unlocked in a previous step.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
45 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 57.
Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building.
To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint, or the perimeter,
of the roof in a plan view, and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_roof.rvt.
Adding a Roof | 57
Click
5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a
green dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.
The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.
6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the green dashed line displays,
click to place the roof line.
8 Select grid line C to place another roof line, and lock it.
9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line, and lock it.
10 Press ESC.
11 Trim the rooflines:
(Trim/Extend).
Adding a Roof | 59
Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep),
and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.
Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.
12 Optionally, place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them.
13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, for Rise/12'', enter 2'', and click OK.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 61.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.
Click OK twice.
Click
9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior.
10 When a green dashed line displays, click to place the 1st curtain wall segment.
11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 2' from
the grid lines toward the building interior.
13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the
dimensions.
If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. These dimensions are not in a
sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimension, but opt to
keep the constraint when prompted.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 64.
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building
entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
3 Click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
4 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All.
All the elements in the list are selected.
5 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None.
6 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.
Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters.
7 Click OK.
11 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.
Creating an Entrance | 65
12 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel: Solid.
13 Click View menu Apply View Template.
14 In the Select View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK.
15 Zoom to the drawing extents.
16 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Medium.
The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this
case an architectural elevation. If you select View Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many
of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected.
17 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.
18 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.
Creating an Entrance | 67
35 Zoom in to the front of the building, and view the new entrance.
38 Press DELETE.
39 Using the same process, remove the mullions from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th panels.
40 Optionally, open the North elevation, and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same
steps that you used to create the south entrance.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 69.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.
Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column, and specify a point to complete the
callout.
8 Select the callout, select the grip closest to the callout head, and drag the grip down to position the callout
head below the grid as shown.
9 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level, and click Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter Display Area, and click OK.
11 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
12 Draw a section line.
Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker.
Move the cursor horizontally to the left, and specify a point past grid line D.
16 Select the section box, and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section Display Area, and click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
21 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Interior - 5 1/2'' Partition (1 hr).
22 On the Options Bar:
Click
Click
23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor, and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines
D and 4 to draw a 17 x 17 rectangular wall inside the grid lines.
Click Sketch.
Click
Click
35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.
36 Press ESC.
37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls.
38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section), double-click Section Display Area.
39 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
40 Move the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB until the chain of walls is selected, and click to select the
walls.
41 On the Options Bar, click
42 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Base Offset, enter 9', and click OK.
43 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
45 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 9', and click OK.
Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling, press TAB until you select the wall chain, and click to
select the walls.
To start the tiles on a wall edge, select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line, and drag it to the
interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall.
To position the grid, select a grid line; on the Tools toolbar, click Move, and specify a distance.
53 Click OK.
54 In the Type Properties dialog, click Cancel.
55 In the Element Properties dialog, click Cancel.
(Rotate).
58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.
60 Press ESC.
61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_stair_.rvt.
When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 5' from the grid line intersection, click to
specify the start point of the reference plane.
Move the cursor vertically, and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B.
Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an
equal number of risers created and risers remaining, and specify a point to create first stair flight.
Move the cursor horizontally to the left, and select the 2nd reference plane.
Move the cursor down, beyond the end of the stair, and specify a point.
The complete stair displays, with a message that 22 risers have been created and that 0 remain.
8 On the Options Bar, click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair, including its handrails.
Click
Select the interior face of the wall, and specify a point away from the wall.
Click Modify.
Select the wall, select the dimension value, enter 4', and press ENTER.
23 While pressing CTRL, select both reference planes, and press DELETE.
Click OK.
Click OK.
The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen.
35 Press SHIFT, press and hold the left mouse button, and move the cursor to spin the building model.
You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building, but if you view the top level
of the building, you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. You must cut an opening through
the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.
Click
Click
Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.
57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_wall_profile_.rvt.
9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3.
(Align).
12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall, and then select the right face of the wall.
13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements.
30 Using the Quadrant snap, snap to the top of the circle, and select it.
31 Move the cursor to the left, and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line.
32 Click Modify.
33 Trim the profile lines:
(Trim/Extend).
Press ESC.
36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line, move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 4'
displays, and click to place it.
37 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the short horizontal line on the right, and press DELETE.
38 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
39 In the Error dialog, click Continue.
You need a closed sketch to complete the profile.
40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch, unlock it, and press DELETE.
46 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, note that for Top Constraint, Up to level: 06 Roof is
selected.
47 Click Cancel.
48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 65'.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
52 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 93.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_host_.rvt.
Click
24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.
25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 8' below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B, and click to place
the line.
26 Using the same method, sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.
33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B, move the cursor up 3', and click to finish
the line.
(Trim/Extend).
35 Select the line that you just drew, and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal
line of the floor.
36 Select the line between grid lines A and B, and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4
and 5.
37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5, and then select the horizontal line near grid
line 1.
Next, create a new type for the sidewalk element, as it is currently a floor element.
53 In the Type Selector, select RPC Female: Cathy, and click to place her on the sidewalk.
59 In the camera view (3D View 1), click the car, and click
60 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter -1', and click OK.
61 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click West.
62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing.
Next, you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a
host for a component, you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host.
63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk.
64 Select Cathy, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
65 Click the sidewalk.
66 Select Alex, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
67 Click the sidewalk.
68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk.
If the sidewalk changes height, both Cathy and Alex will move with it.
69 Using the same method, pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
71 Proceed to the next exercise, Linking a Service Core to the Building Project on page 101.
The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. After the service core is linked to
your project, you must cut another shaft opening around it, so it will cut through the floors of the building.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_host_style_railings_.rvt.
Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof, you
delete the entire stairwell.
11 Click Open.
The building service core displays in your drawing.
12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D.
(Align).
14 Select the top horizontal floor line, and then select the top horizontal core wall.
Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. You cannot constrain elements in the current project
to elements in linked models.
Click OK.
, press SHIFT, and spin the building to get a better view of the core. You can see that the service core
cuts through the floors of the building.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
25 Proceed to the final exercise, Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 104.
You copy the railing type into your project from another project, where it is hosted within a railing family.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt.
(Split).
14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 2' to the left of grid line C, and click to split the floor.
20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 5' and click to draw another line.
21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.
22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched, move the cursor vertically 5', and
click to draw another line.
23 Complete the sketch as shown.
(Align).
25 Select grid line B, select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B, and click the lock to lock the alignment.
26 Select grid line D, select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D, and click the lock to lock the
alignment.
28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown, and lock the alignment.
29 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Lock the dimensions.
Click
36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.
A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added.
Click Crop Region Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view.
Documenting Your
Projects
111
NOTE For training purposes, slight modifications to the building design have been made.
In this tutorial, you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse
Flats project. You learn to:
Create new project views, including plan, elevation, section, and detail views
113
Creating Views
In this lesson, you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing
views, how to create section and elevation views, and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt.
14 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1''= 80'-0''.
Next, hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.
15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.
Section view
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.
Move the cursor down, and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2
and 3.
18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents, and move them to just outside of the
left side of the building.
19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section
head to the section line endpoint.
Click the midpoint of the section line, drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair, and click to
place it.
24 Select gridline F, select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble, and drag the top segment
of gridline F to the right.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair, and specify a point to complete the callout.
On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the callout boundary.
Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head, and move it to the left side of the
callout boundary.
Select the middle grip, and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.
Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building, and specify a point above and to the right of the roof
overhang.
Move the cursor diagonally down, and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Detail Views (Details), and right-click Detail 0 Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail, and click OK.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
Click OK.
24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing, and on the Options Bar, click
Click OK.
36 In the drawing, select the callout, and on the Options Bar, click
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt.
2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.
The crop region displays as red, and features blue triangular grips and break marks.
3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.
5 On the View Toolbar, click Zoom to Fit.
6 On the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible.
8 Click OK.
Callouts
Elevations
Grids
Levels
Sections
14 Click OK.
Callouts, elevation markers, grids, levels, and section lines are now hidden in the view.
16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Create View Template From View.
17 In the New View Template dialog, enter Black and White Presentation Elevation, and click OK.
18 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
20 In the Project Browser, right-click North, and click Apply View Template.
21 In the Select View Template dialog, select Black and White Presentation Elevation, click Apply, and click
OK.
The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.
Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level Below (Level 4).
Under View Depth, for Level, select Level Below (Level 4).
Click OK twice.
NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.
6 In the Project Browser, select Roof Plan, right-click, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
8 In the View Range dialog:
Click OK twice.
Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building
9 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Plan Region.
NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan
Region.
10 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
11 On the Options Bar, click
(Rectangle).
In the left corner of the building, select the left endpoint of the outer wall.
Move you cursor diagonally, and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.
Click OK twice.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click Edit/New.
5 In the Filters dialog, under Filters, click
(New).
6 In the Filter Name dialog, enter Rated Walls, and click OK.
7 In the Filters dialog, under Categories, select Walls.
8 Under Filter Rules:
Select contains.
Enter Hr.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Filter tab, click Add.
11 Select Rated Walls, and click OK.
12 On the Filter tab, for Rated Walls, under Projection/Surface, click Override under Patterns.
13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Color, click No Override.
14 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, select the red color, and click OK.
15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid Fill.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click OK.
On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog, click Remove, and click OK.
The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the
drawing at any time, but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.
20 Click File menu Save.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 Duplicate View Duplicate.
2 Select Copy of Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Unit 18 Plan Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom to Fit.
6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left, as shown.
9 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region Hide Crop Region.
Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown
10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Masking Region.
11 In the Type Selector, select Invisible lines.
NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.
(Rectangle).
19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.
The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. The hidden crop
region is also revealed.
32 Select one of the lamps, right-click, and click Unhide in view Category.
33 On the View Control Bar, click
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.rvt.
A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields
in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters
with the appropriate text fields.
NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every
time the project file is saved.
(Properties).
Click OK.
Anytown, MA 12345
12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, continue to add project information:
14 Click OK.
The new project information displays in the titleblock.
A104 - Elevations
A105 - Elevations
A106 - Elevations
A107 - Sections
A108 - Stairs
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Floor Plan.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 1, and drag it to the sheet.
3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet, and
click to place the view.
The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet, align it with the East elevation, and click
to place it.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
14 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Scale, select 1-1/2'' = 1'0'', and click OK.
15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.
Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.
16 Select title bar, and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.
NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar, zoom in to the grip, move the cursor over it,
and press TAB until it highlights.
22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers, and notice they also reference
the correct sheet numbers.
23 Click File menu Save.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
3 At the right end of the Roof level line, zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.
4 Double-click the Roof elevation height, enter 54', and press ENTER.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Click OK.
Click OK.
10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows off Shadows on.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region Hide Crop Region.
14 Under 3D Views, drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet, and click to place it in the center of the sheet.
In this tutorial, you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans,
such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules,
such as room and window schedules, in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.
161
Tagging Objects
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. You learn how to
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.rvt.
3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Separation.
Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.
NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room
and Area.
4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left, move the cursor to the right, and click the
opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area
of the drawing), as shown:
5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right,
as shown:
6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the
living area.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the room tag.
The room tag number displays in blue, indicating that it can be edited.
16 Zoom in on the tag number, click it, enter U18-1, and press ENTER.
17 Click the room text label, enter Entry, and press ENTER.
Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.
Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the
one that displays at the tip of the cursor.
NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also
supported.
24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, Model Categories tab, expand Lines, clear Room Separation,
and click OK.
Entry door
7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click
(Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, enter U18-2, and click OK.
9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room
tags.
10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.
11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.
24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.
9 Click Modify.
11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.
12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.
13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader.
16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.
(Filter Selection).
21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK.
22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.
You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.
You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building
model.
Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to
a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams.rvt.
Count
Height
Level
Type Mark
Width
8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking
Move Up or Move Down.
9 Click OK.
23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H,
as shown:
25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.
26 Click File menu Save As, and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.
5 Click OK.
The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.
6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and
click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
Head Detail
Jamb Detail
Sill Detail
11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.
12 Click OK twice.
16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark
A, for Head Detail, enter 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, enter 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, enter 3/A107.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
Count
Head Height
Sill Height
Width
Mark
7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule
that includes only the doors in Unit 18.
Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).
Name
Level
Area
NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header
is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.
In the schedule, for room 101, for Name, enter Building Entry, and press ENTER.
In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Visibility/Graphics Overrides,
expand Lines.
Under Custom colors, click the bright green swatch, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. First, draw the horizontal
line.
Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.
14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1, and zoom in to the Corridor.
19 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas), as shown:
(Properties).
21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, clear Room Bounding, and click OK.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 In the Project Browser, double-click Room Schedule.
Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding
behavior of the walls.
31 Using the same method, add 2 more key names: Service and Public.
32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Room Schedule, and click Properties.
33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
34 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, click Room Style, and click Add.
35 Click OK twice.
36 In the Project Browser, double-click Room Schedule.
The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.
37 Under U17-8, for Room Style, select Units.
(Filter Selection).
42 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Rooms, and click OK.
All rooms are selected in the floor plan.
(Properties).
44 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Units, and click OK.
45 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Room Schedule.
Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1.
46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106:
All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. The Room Style specification will be used later to
determine color fill in a room color diagram.
47 Click File menu Save.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
(Duplicate).
4 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Room Type, and click OK.
5 For Title, enter Room Type.
6 For Color, select Room Style.
7 Since you are creating a new color scheme, at the warning prompt, click OK.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, click the Color Scheme field.
11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, select Room Type, and click OK.
23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively.
24 Click OK.
(Properties).
4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Roof : Wood Joist - Insulation on Plywood Deck - EPDM.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
6 Click View menu New Material Takeoff.
7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog, under Category, select Roofs, and click OK.
8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Family and Type,
and click Add.
9 Using the same method, add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.
12 Click OK.
The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays.
20 Click OK.
21 Click the Formatting tab, and under Fields, click Estimated Cost.
22 For Field formatting, select Calculate totals, and click OK twice.
23 In the Material Takeoff, for the Material: Cost field, enter the following values:
Material: Description
Value
EPDM
1.50
Plywood
1.25
Rigid Insulation
4.75
Wood Joist
.50
24 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.
25 In the Element Properties dialog, for Formatting, click Edit.
26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Fields, click Estimated Cost.
27 Click Field Format, and specify the following:
28 Click OK 3 times.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared
Parameters.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.
25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes, and use the same method to select the Path ID
parameter.
28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window, and press DELETE.
6 Move the cursor to the right, and click in the center of the corridor, above the exterior door as shown.
7 Move the cursor down, through the door, and click outside of the building.
13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines, and click
(Properties).
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 1-1, and click OK.
18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan, move the cursor near
the right corner, and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.
28 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path, and click
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 2-1, and click OK.
30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.
(Properties).
34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, while pressing CTRL, select Path
ID and Travel Distance, and click Add.
35 Click the Filter tab.
36 For Filter by, in the first field, select Path ID; in the second field, select contains; and in the third field,
enter 1-.
37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.
38 For Sort by, select Path ID.
39 Clear Itemize every instance.
40 Click the Formatting tab.
41 Under Fields, select Travel Distance, and under Field formatting, select Calculate Totals.
42 Click OK.
The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.
43 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Duplicate
View Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 2 Exit Distance, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Exit Distance, and click Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
48 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, in the third field, enter 2-, and click OK twice.
The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.
2 In the New Schedules dialog, under Categories, select Walls, and click OK.
3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
4 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
Area
Volume
Width
Length
Assembly Code
Assembly Description
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.
1 On the File menu, click Export ODBC Database.
2 In the Select Data Source dialog, click the File Data Source tab.
3 Click New.
4 In the Create New Data Source dialog, select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb), and click Next.
5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN, and click Next.
6 Click Finish.
7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, under Database, click Create.
8 In the New Database dialog, under Database Name, enter Revit_Project.mdb for Database Name.
9 Under Directories, select a location for the database file, and click OK to create the database.
10 When the confirmation displays, click OK in the dialog.
11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, click OK.
12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs, and open the database in Microsoft Access.
Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of
the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Additionally,
tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.
A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements, so that each table of elements includes an Id
column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For
example, instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instances type, and some
instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.
In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category, a table is also created for each key schedule
in a project, as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The exported
columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule, in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule
gives elements in its category a new parameter, which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key
schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.
One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly
Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes
an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table.
Annotating and
Dimensioning
In this tutorial, you learn how to change the base elevation of a project, and how
to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.
209
Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. After you define the building levels as
shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.
(Properties).
In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you
must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in
the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base
parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.
5 In the Type Properties dialog:
Click Duplicate.
In the Name dialog, enter 1/4'' Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK.
6 Click OK twice.
The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.
Press and hold CTRL, and select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level.
All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.
16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 214.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit
Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically
when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch
profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn
on their visibility to view them.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space
planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions,
and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.
Linear and multi-segmented dimensions
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a green dashed line displays
along the left side of the curtain, select it.
4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a green dashed line
displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.
5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.
6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.
The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls
without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained
in this way.
9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left
endpoint of the first planter to the right.
10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it.
11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.
12
13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces.
14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.
15 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.
16 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall.
17 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed,
and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.
Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances
18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click
to make all the dimension segments equal and
reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.
Click
(Radial).
23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it.
24 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension.
25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
(Properties).
29 In the Element Properties dialog, for Suffix, enter Typ., and click OK.
30 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
Click
(Angular).
36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension.
37 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
38 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 221.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Click Options.
Click OK.
These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are
referenced in the overall dimension string.
6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.
When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to
override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate
the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls
would be located on the centerline of each wall.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.
7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the
dimension.
8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.
9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.
15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click
to place the dimension.
Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall
17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.
18 Press and hold SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the
dimension down the wall.
19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.
20 Release SHIFT, and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition
wall.
21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line
gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.
22 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on
page 227.
Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
2 Click
(Properties).
Click OK twice.
8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.
11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type,
and modify it to use the office standard parameters.
(None).
4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a
text box.
Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
7 Select the text box, and click
Click
A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box.
Click
Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.
21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click
Click Rename.
In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Standard Notes, and click OK.
Click OK twice.
(Arc).
28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.
29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text.
30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.
32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Detailing
In this tutorial, you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. You
can detail directly in a view of the building information model, using detail
components to represent materials like lumber, plywood, and metal studs. These
components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to
associate with the model, like a standard door header condition, you use a separate
drafting view in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is
not parametrically linked to the building model.
237
In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define
that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over the building model
geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the
siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.
NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
20 Move the component end point:
Select the corrugated metal component, and on the Edit toolbar, click
(Move).
Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.
Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.
Click Modify.
21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component, and press DELETE.
Because you still have several components to load, you load them as a group from a single file.
34 In the Type Selector, select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8, and place it in the detail view as shown.
38 Click Modify.
39 Select the horizontal segment, click the Flip instance arrows, and click Modify.
The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.
NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.
Add insulation
40 On the Design Bar, click Insulation.
41 On the Options Bar:
43 Click Modify.
44 Move the upper segment:
Select the upper segment of insulation, and on the Edit toolbar, click
Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point.
Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point.
(Move).
Click Modify.
52 Click Modify.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Lines on page 245.
4 Click Modify.
5 Select the vertical plywood component; drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component.
Click
(Pick Lines).
9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist, as shown.
Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.
Click
(Pick Lines).
15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component, as shown.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and draw the detail lines as shown.
20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.
Click
(Pick Lines).
28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard, and then select the interior edge of
the horizontal segment.
32 Click Modify.
33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask, select the
break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Text Notes on page 248.
7 Click Modify.
8 Select the dimension line, and click
(Properties).
9 In the Element Properties dialog, for Text Suffix, enter Typ., and click OK.
(Filter Selection).
6 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items and Dimensions, and click OK.
The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.
7 Click Modify.
8 Zoom in to the metal coping; while pressing CTRL, select all the coping linework.
You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment, pressing TAB, and selecting the chain.
14 Click Modify.
15 Use a window to select all linework; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
16 Click Modify.
17 Click File menu Save As.
18 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter Roof Edge, and click Save.
26 Press DELETE.
The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.
27 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
28 On the Options Bar, click Load.
29 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail
Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge.rfa, and click Open.
30 In the drawing area, click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.
31 Using the same method used previously, delete the underlying linework.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Keynotes on page 252.
Adding Keynotes
In this exercise, you place keynotes on objects, and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated
with them.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
In the drawing area, select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.
In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 07200 07210 07210.B5, 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation, and
click OK.
6 Click Modify.
(Properties).
For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard, use keynote 09250.D1.
11 Press DELETE.
12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.
13 In the Type Selector, select Medium Line Detail Component.
14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.
15 Click Modify.
16 Select the component, and click
(Properties).
39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang.
40 Click Modify.
41 Select the component just added, and click
42 Using the same method used previously, name the component 2 x 8 Framing, and assign it keynote
06110.G1.
43 Zoom to the repeating component.
44 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail, and click the lower end at the break line.
46 Click Modify.
47 Select the component, and click
48 Using the same method used previously, name the component Air Barrier, and assign it keynote 07260.A5.
49 With the component selected, on the Edit toolbar, click
(Move).
50 Move the air barrier to the right, against the 3/4" plywood.
55 Click Modify.
56 Delete both dashed detail lines, leaving the detail component lines.
57 Select the vertical hidden line component, and click
58 Using the method used previously, name the component Vapor Barrier, and assign it keynote 07260.A4.
Add keynotes
59 Zoom to the drawing extents.
60 On the Design Bar, click Keynote Element.
61 In the drawing area, add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane, Air Barrier, 2 x 8 Framing, and Vapor Barrier.
69 Using the method used previously, name the component Batt Insul., and assign it keynote 07210.A4.
70 In the drawing area, add a keynote for the component.
71 Save the file.
72 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying a Keynote Database on page 258.
Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A9, and press ENTER.
Enter 07460.
3 In the text editor, click File menu Save, and close the text editor.
7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog, under Path Type, select Absolute, and click OK.
13 Click Modify.
14 Save the file.
Click Open.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Drafting Views (Detail), right-click Drafting 1, and click
Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter EPDM Metal Coping, and click OK.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Reference Callout on page 260.
5 Click Modify.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point.
16 Select the left edge of the region, select the width dimension, and enter 5/8".
17 Click Modify.
18 While pressing CTRL, select the left and bottom edges of the region.
19 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
20 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
(Mirror).
(Draw).
Move the cursor up, and click above the top of the region as the end point.
24 Select the mirrored region, and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6.
25 Click Modify.
Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.
35 Select all the linework for the wood region; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
36 Align the wood region to the 2x6:
(Align).
Select the right edge of the lower 2x6, and select the right edge of the wood region.
41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is
3/4" and the height is 2 1/2".
Click
(Pick).
45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.
You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.
(Align).
47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.
48 Click Modify.
Click
(Pick Lines).
Click
(Draw).
Select Chain.
Move the cursor left 1", and click to select the point.
Move the cursor down 1', and click to select the point.
Move the cursor right 1", and click to select the point.
(Trim/Extend).
55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line.
56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Click
(Pick Lines).
60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region.
61 Click Modify.
62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 3", and press ENTER.
68 Click Modify.
69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.
NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as
a guide.
74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the
2x6.
(Mirror).
87 Click Modify.
88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles
as shown.
(Mirror).
94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 1/8", and press ENTER.
95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.
97 On the Options Bar, click
98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.
99 Click Modify.
Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the
adjoining vertical region.
106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.
107 Select the dimension line, and on the Options Bar, click
117 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.
120 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text.
121 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.
123 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.
In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project
documentation, including:
Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into
project sheets
277
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets.rvt.
(Properties).
11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate,
and click OK.
(Copy).
13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.
(Properties).
15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official
for specific requirements.
16 For Tag, enter B.
17 Click OK.
18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.
20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward
the building, as shown:
NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays,
and click.
Text
Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.
Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.
Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.
On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add.
On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center.
On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 1/4'' in the second field,
and select Bold.
26 Click OK.
The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.
30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand
the column to display the note text.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
32 Zoom in to see the note block.
On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add.
On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does
not equal, and in the third field, enter T.
4 Click OK.
The drawing list displays.
8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the
text.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two
most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component
legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that
identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On
construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame
schedule, and so on).
NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit
Architecture building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or
note block.
Door Tag
Window Tag
Level Indicator
Door Tag
Window Tag
Sheet Keynote
For Family, select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.
7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.
13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text, and enter Wall Type 1 Patio
Divider.
NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line, for example to force a line break between ''Wall
Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.''
14 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.
16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.
17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.
18 Enter the following text, pressing ENTER between component descriptions, and click Modify on the Design
Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking.
The text note with leader is added to the legend.
19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.
24 In the Project Browser, under Legends, select 4th Floor Wall Types, drag it onto the sheet, and click to place
it in the upper left corner of the sheet.
(Match Type).
31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view, select the Wall Type 2 component.
Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled, indicating that it captured the wall type properties.
36 Optionally, click
8 Click OK.
9 Click File menu Save.
Modify a wall
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
(Move).
5 Select the partition, move the cursor up, and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Issue a revision
3 On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
4 For the Sequence 1 revision, select Issued, and click OK.
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in
the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
9 Click OK.
10 Click File menu Save.
4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.
Importing Spreadsheets
In this exercise, you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The only
way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click A102 - Unit 18.
2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet, Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.xls.
NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system to system.
This exercise demonstrates a common method.
3 In Microsoft Excel, click File menu Print.
4 Under Printer, for Name, select the document writer.
5 Click OK.
6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog, click Desktop, for File name, enter Fixture Schedule.mdi, and click
Save.
Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format, you could use a screen capture utility to save the
worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This step has been completed for you, and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG.
7 In the Revit Architecture window, click File menu Import/Link Image.
8 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\Fixture Schedule.JPG.
9 Click to place the image on the sheet.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.
In this tutorial, you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.
The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site, as well as a large
lab building.
The large floor plan, or footprint, for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted
sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project, you break up the plan
into sections, called dependent views.
303
| 305
Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views
Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project
Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\ i_Dependent_Views.rvt
2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK.
5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit.
6 In the drawing area, select the crop region.
The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation
crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.
7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out
the lab building.
8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the
drawing (the aviary).
17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.
The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.
Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the
second column of lab cubicles.)
Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.
Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.
The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.
41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs.
42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.
43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the
matchline.
NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.
48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation
region so you can see the view reference.
NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference
for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.
49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag
for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view Elements.
50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\ i_Dependent_Views.rvt
2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click
Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK.
5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.
6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the
view to the aviary.
8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a Dependent.
9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK.
11 Select the crop region.
12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping
the view to the lab building.
18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet.
19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.
20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet.
21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.
28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right.
29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.
NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from
the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop
controls to modify it.
321
Viewing
In this tutorial, you learn to create and customize views of building information
models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to
change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.
More specifically, you learn how to change the visibility of detail components,
how to control fill pattern colors, and how to use plan regions within floor plans
and reflected ceiling plans.
323
You create elevations, sections, and three-dimensional (3D) views, and learn how to control the visibility of building
components and annotations within views.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Viewing_Exercise.rvt.
TIP If the Project Browser does not display, on the Standard toolbar, click
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click East.
A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. Both hidden lines
and window tags display in the east elevation view.
The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The default name of the view is {3D}.
10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand
12 Press and hold CTRL, and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View with a Camera on page 327.
Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing, outside of the dimension lines.
Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building, as shown in the following illustration.
After you specify the second point (the view target), the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default
in a perspective view.
4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model, select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region
and move them out.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom All To Fit.
Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Move the cursor up, down, and sideways to see how the view changes.
Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.
Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with
the other controls.
17 In My 3D View, select the camera target point (the magenta grip), and move it to another location.
3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.
18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties:
In the Element Properties dialog, under Camera, enter 50' 0" for Eye Elevation and 5' 6" for Target
Elevation.
Click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading.
25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model, as shown in the following
illustration.
26 Click and hold the rotation tool, and rotate the section box around the model.
Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. The box represents the extents
of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the
fill pattern.
6 In the Project Browser, select the section view, right-click, and click Find Referring Views.
7 In the Go To View dialog, select Floor Plan: Level 1, and click Open View.
8 Select the section line, and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the
following illustration.
4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby, place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby
entrance, and click.
Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.
The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes, indicating the possible elevation views that you
can create. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view, Elevation 1 - a.
9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view, Elevation 1 - b.
11 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
In addition, you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse
level of detail, such as the one below, you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type, in this case, a shade of gray.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Showroom.rvt.
Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Section Head - Filled), and double-click
Wall/Floor Join - Level 3.
Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. Each layer is
designated by the material settings of the layer.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type on page 339.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
In this exercise, you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern
from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are
displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Showroom.rvt.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339
12 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Fine.
13 Zoom in on the arced wall.
Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied
because the detail level is set to Fine.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture, refer to the online Help for more information.
Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan
view, it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.
By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height, you can display the stepped portion of the walls
in the Level 1 floor plan.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Plan_Region.rvt.
Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left.
Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right.
The plan region displays as a dashed green line. When you select the plan region, the line turns red.
The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan
region.
10 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
10
In this tutorial, you learn to use the AccuRender Radiosity and Raytrace features
in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your
building information model; to place and render decals to create signs, billboards,
and posters; and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.
AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is
used to produce rendered views.
347
You learn to create and apply materials to a building model, add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site,
and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you select a scene that
defines the model environment, and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.
change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.
change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.
define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.
When you complete these changes, you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the floor, and
the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Cohouse.rvt.
4 In the Element Properties dialog, select System Family: Basic Wall for Family, verify that Co-house - Exterior
- Brick on CMU is displayed for Type, and click Edit/New.
5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. Verify that the material defined
for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry - Brick.
6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to
the exterior finish at this time.
A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the
Material Library.
10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog, under _accurender, expand Masonry and click Brick.
11 Under Name, select Carib,_12",Running.
12 Click OK twice.
You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.
Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.
14 On the Options Bar, verify that Floor : Floor 3 displays in the Type Selector, and click
Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions
20 On the Settings menu, click Materials.
21 In the Materials dialog, under Name, click Duplicate.
22 In the New Material dialog, enter Aluminum, Polished and click OK.
23 Under AccuRender, click
24 In the Material Library, under _accurender, expand Metals, and click Aluminum.
25 Under Name, select Polished,Plain.
26 Click OK twice.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building.
TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection, press TAB to cycle your selection through
different building model components. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status
Bar at the bottom of the screen, select the curtain wall mullion again.
Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made
34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Region Raytrace.
35 Move the cursor over the building model, and draw the rectangular region shown in the following
illustration.
Make sure the region includes the exterior walls, floor, and curtain wall mullions to which you made
material changes.
36 In the Scene Selection dialog, verify that New is selected, select Exterior under Type, and click OK.
37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied
to the exterior walls, floor, and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments), producing
a photorealistic effect.
38 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building
model in hidden line wireframe.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 352.
In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the
season and location specified in the render scene settings.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse.rvt.
2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.
3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component.
TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.
4 In the Type Selector, select Tree - Deciduous : Acer Rubrum 30'.
Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. The tree that you selected in this
step is a red maple.
5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site, and click to place a tree.
Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the
following illustration.
to
12 In the Plant Library, under accurender, expand Trees and Shrubs, and click Deciduous.
13 Under Name, select Oak, Black, and click OK.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Black Oak for Type Comments.
15 Under Other, enter 22' 0" for Plant Height, and click OK twice.
The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site.
16 Move the cursor to the building site, and place two black oak trees, as shown in the following illustration.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse.rvt.
Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.
Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.
3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.
Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view
4 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective
view name), and click Show Camera.
5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. view. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of
vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.
6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in
the following illustration.
7 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior, and click OK.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View on page 357.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse.rvt.
You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view.
28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.
30 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of
the building model.
To create the rendered scene, you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor, define
the view and render scene settings, and finally, use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.
Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render
1 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 362.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse.rvt.
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.
Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.
The interior perspective is displayed, but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display
more of the view.
3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the
following illustration.
5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.
11 On the View menu, click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.
12 On the View menu, click View Properties.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box is displayed around the building model.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the section box.
Grips are displayed on the section box.
15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you
want to render is visible.
This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your
interior view. By limiting the geometry, you reduce the rendering time.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a New Render Scene on page 366.
The radiosity process, which can take several minutes, begins. Light bounce is calculated for each individual
light. When radiate completes, the following rendered view is displayed. The RPC people do not display
in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.
The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file.
By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You
learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.
Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with
any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. When you export your walkthrough to an
AVI, you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
Wireframe
AccuRender (Raytrace)
IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option, you must select or define a scene.
Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.
You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining room, and
ends in the far corner of the living room.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt.
NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values, click Settings Project
Units, and change unit formats as desired.
6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options Bar, click
.
The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed, surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the
following illustration. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the
walkthrough path is not precisely the same.
8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.
If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.
9 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.
11 Under Change, verify Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.
15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog, enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from
300 to 60, and click OK.
16 On the Options Bar, enter 1 for Frame, and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning
(the key frame).
17 Click
The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.
NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time, press ESC.
18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, Changing the Walkthrough Path and
Camera Position on page 372.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Far Clip Active, and click OK.
Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.
The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.
5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the
following illustration.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera
displays at a slightly different location.
7 Click the third key frame position, and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration.
7 Try creating other walkthroughs, specifying the number of frames, reducing the size of the image, perhaps
to 6 wide x 4 height, and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. If you had 150 frames and
a frame rate of 15 seconds, then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10
seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and
smooth movement.
8 If you want to save this exercise, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
11
The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable
for creating sustainable designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of
shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar
studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building
during specific times of the day and year.
In this tutorial, you create interior and exterior views of a building information
model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer
and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the
other as a series of images.
More specifically, you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a
building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during
the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.
377
A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.
A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.
A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Solar_Study.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click
in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point, as shown.
A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because
of minor variations in camera placement.
5 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view, as
shown.
Create section
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house, as shown.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway, and click OK.
.
to reorient the view.
12 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right, as
shown.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site, including the
house, as shown.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
19 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway, and click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Fine.
21 On the File menu, click Save.
The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. You can create a still, single-day, or multi-day solar study.
5 Click the Single-Day tab.
For the Single-Day solar study, you specify the location, date, and time range, as well as a time interval for
the frames of the solar animation.
6 Click the Multi-Day tab.
For the Multi-Day solar study, you specify the location, date range, and time, as well as a time interval for
the frames of the solar animation.
7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab.
8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA is selected, and click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
10 Under Place, click
Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Preview Solar Study.
7 On the Options Bar, under Frame, you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation:
8 On the Options Bar, click the control buttons to preview the animation:
.
.
.
.
NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.
11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
13 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Preview Solar Study.
14 On the Options Bar, click
The solar study animation plays, showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date
specified.
Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area, approximately as shown.
4 Sketch rooms:
Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area, as shown.
Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area, as shown.
NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the
living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor
plan helps to determine the best layout.
5 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Advanced Model Graphics.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Cast Shadows is selected.
8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
11 To display the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab,
select Section Boxes, and click OK.
13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang, as
shown.
NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.
14 Click outside of the section box, and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area, if necessary.
15 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
Export as AVI
16 Click File menu Export Animated Solar Study.
17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:
Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.
For File name, enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
To maintain the proportions of the frame, you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated
automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.
NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. Limiting
the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames.
18 In the Save As dialog, click Save.
19 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.
NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The AVI can then typically be played from
within the zip file.
20 On the File menu, click Save.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Exporting a Study as PNG on page 389.
Export as PNG
1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Advanced Model Graphics.
3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 Click File menu Export Animated Solar Study.
7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:
For File name, enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
NOTE When you export to PNG, or any single-frame format, such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP, or GIF, it is recommended
that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files, depending on the Frame
Range. In this example, the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.
8 In the Save As dialog, click Save.
The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date and time
stamped, as shown:
NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.
3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts, as shown.
5 Select the roof, and on the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate Hide Category.
Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.
10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Multi-Day tab.
11 Select Multi Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA, and click Duplicate.
12 In the Name dialog, for File name enter 2pm - Los Angeles - Week Interval, and click OK.
13 Specify values for the multi-day study:
Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain, and click OK.
In the Save As dialog, for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.
16 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select Full Frames (Uncompressed), and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Solar Study Off.
18 On the File menu, click Save.
5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click OK.
6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click Apply.
Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view.
8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Summer Solstice.
9 Under Date and Time, specify 11:00 AM for time, and click OK.
NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting, so you may need to make your own adjustment for
specific studies. For example, to see the sun at its highest point on June 22, you would set the time to 1:00 PM
rather than 12:00 PM.
11 Under Date and Time, change the time back to 12:00 PM, and click OK.
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click OK.
16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Orientation, select True North, and click OK.
On the Options Bar, in the Angle from Project to True North field, enter 45 and press ENTER to set the
angle of rotation.
NOTE Settings for the location and orientation, including the angle from True North, are saved with the project.
19 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
20 Click View menu Refresh.
Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.
23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, select Summer Solstice, and click Apply.
24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Single-Day tab, click Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.
Under Format, for Dimensions, enter 600 in the first field, and click in the second dimension field to
see the value calculated automatically.
27 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
28 Once you are finished with the study, it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project
North for documentation and annotation purposes:
In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Orientation, select Project North, and click OK.
NOTE Retain the 45 value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for
this project.
29 On the File menu, click Save.
to house from SW
living area
This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.
On the Options Bar, for Scene, select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.
In the Save As dialog, for Save as Type, select JPEG, and click Save.
7 Review some captured images of the building. In the Project Browser, under Renderings, double-click each
of the following images:
Presentation Views
12
399
building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model,
Co-house, you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Cohouse.rvt.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Second Floor Plan, and click OK.
Modify visibility/graphics
4 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation
categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all tags, dimensions, sections, elevations, and so on in this view.
6 Click the Model Categories tab.
7 Under Visibility, expand the Stairs category, and clear DOWN Text, Down Arrow, UP Text, Up Arrow.
NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.
8 Click OK.
Notice that no annotations display in this view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.
3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:
The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Sun and Shadow Settings.
for Place.
Within a Project, you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. At that place, you
can create, modify, and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype.
7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click the Place tab.
8 Select Boston, MA, USA for City, and click OK.
NOTE For this step, you can enter any city you wish; however, be aware that if you enter a different city, most
of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings
that you choose.
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.
10 Select Ground Plane at Level, and select 1st Flr. Cnst.
This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.
11 Click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a
sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, clear Ground Plane at Level, and click OK.
This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.
16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique, you need to create a new viewport type that
does not display the view title.
For this analytique, you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this, you
will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.
19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building model and
each line should be equidistant.
Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region, you must define the inner perimeter
by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.
20 On the Options Bar, click
21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model, draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of
the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.
TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details, and you should
take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. If necessary, use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or
overlapping intersections.
TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines, create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide
lines. When you are finished drawing the chain, select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back
to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.
22 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
25 In the Name dialog, enter Solid Black, and click OK.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Fill Pattern, click
27 In the Fill Patterns dialog, under Name, scroll down, select Solid Fill, and click OK.
28 In the Type Properties dialog, verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black, and click OK.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
2 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click Copy of South, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation South Elevation, and click OK.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation
floor plan.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
To fit correctly in the analytique, this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To accomplish this, you will
create a callout around the building model components within the section view.
6 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
7 On the Options Bar, select 1/8" = 1'- 0" for Scale.
8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown.
Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily
identifiable.
Casework
Ceilings
Furniture
Lighting Fixtures
Specialty Equipment
19 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
20 Click OK.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible, clear Annotation Crop, and
click OK.
Notice that the crop regions no longer display.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Click Apply.
Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.
TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.
In the steps that follow, you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation
view with more contrast.
TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of
the section line in the previous exercise.
TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.
11 On the File menu, click Save.
12 Proceed with the next exercise, Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 419.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. In the steps that follow, you accomplish this by rotating
the callout within the section view.
To rotate an object, you click to specify the start radius, move the cursor in the direction of the rotation,
and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.
10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference, specify 3 oclock as the
rotation start point.
11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise, and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of
rotation, and press ENTER.
After you enter the rotation value and press Enter, the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice the extents need
to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.
12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as
shown.
14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport, and drag it up and to the left as shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet,
and click OK.
18 Right-click the viewport, and click Deactivate View.
19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), double-click Section 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.
After you add the callout, click Modify, select the callout, and modify the extents and the callout head
location as shown.
4 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 1, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Callout, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown.
This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.
NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet, activate the viewport, turn on the crop
region from the view properties dialog, and make adjustments as necessary. When finished, hide the crop region
and deactivate the viewport.
The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow, you add a heavy base to
the floors and a poche to the base. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas
of contrast, the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, specify the following:
Select Directly.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
11 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.
21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway
through the second floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.
Before turning off the visibility of the section box, make a duplicate of the view.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 2, and click Duplicate View Duplicate.
23 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 2, and click Rename.
NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box, the stairs and railings may display.
In such a case, either adjust the plane location, or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the
Visibility/Graphics dialog.
31 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
32 On the Annotation Categories tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
Next, you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the
continual erosion of the structure.
34 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and,
in the Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
35 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
36 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.
7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name, and click OK.
8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
9 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the
following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.
445
Exporting to Autodesk
3ds Max or VIZ
13
In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to
Autodesk3ds Max or AutodeskVIZ, where you render it and create a daylight
analysis.
Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that
provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most
complex problems in design visualization and visual effects.
Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application
that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and
sharing your design intent.
For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ.
NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your
system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier
version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.
447
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.
There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process
more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry,
and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use
any of these options at this time.
Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected.
If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view
name automatically displays for the File Name.
Click Options.
4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK.
The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple
sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple
polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended
that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids.
5 In the Export dialog, click Save.
6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary.
The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified.
7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the
tutorial.
Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making
changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export
only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.
Click OK.
13 Click File menu Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.
Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate
it is selected.
In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display
in your 3ds Max scene.
Click OK.
The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera
position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.
(Dolly Camera).
Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.
(Quick Render).
The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments
that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because
this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.
Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max
(Material Editor).
33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click
(Get Material).
34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.
All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with
the elements display in the right pane of the browser.
35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.
36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK.
37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch.
In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.
In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.
42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose.
43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.
44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click
45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup.
46 Under Location, click Get Location.
47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK.
48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250.
49 Under Time:
(Modify).
50 Click Rendering menu Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed.
51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color
to a sky blue color.
53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next
to the selector.
The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then
click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active
viewport.
54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480.
55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>.
56 Click Render.
The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as
the addition of the daylight system and sky.
A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max
After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain
wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.
15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall
Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog.
16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select.
The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the
cameras visibility of these objects.
(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection
A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Daylight Analysis on page 459.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max.
1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu Environment.
2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control.
Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of
visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to
pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted.
3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:
(Render Scene).
The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis
is then created.
14
The ability to import SketchUp files directly into Revit Architecture allows you
to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the
SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been
imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components.
In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an
in-place mass family.
After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front
mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such
as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.
461
You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or
you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.
Click Open.
18 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 464.
After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.
7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected.
This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.
8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.
In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the
middle mass.
17 Click
to turn off the mass visibility in the view, and display only the roofs that
, and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form.
24 Click
29 Using the same technique, create the 2 curtain systems shown below.
, and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms.
39 Click
Below the right corner of the view, specify a point to place the camera.
In the far left corner of the building that you created, specify a point for the camera target, as shown.
The perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips
display.
43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building, and click in the drawing area to
hide the grips.
to view only the walls, roofs, and curtain systems that make up your building
You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips.
Click OK.
48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.
50 Select each roof to display its grips, and move the roof edges as shown below.
, and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building.
Creating Families
475
15
All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are family based. The term family
describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you
manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple
types defined within it, each with a different size, shape, material set, or other
parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types
within a family can look completely different, they are still related and come from
a single source, thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple
through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family
or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the
time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.
In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.
477
Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. All different types that
you create are stored with the master family file. For example, if you create a family called "double-hung window" that
includes types with several sizes, the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.
This makes file management much easier, because there is only one file to track. There are, however, exceptions to this
rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the
project environment. Walls, floors, and roofs are examples of these types of families. In addition, there is another type
of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture
recognize it as a particular component type, such as a dome roof.
Revit Architecture has three types of families:
System
Standard Component
In-place
System Families
System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls,
floors, and roofs. The basic walls system family, for example, has wall types that define interior, exterior, foundation,
generic, and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families, but you cannot create new
system families.
NOTE You can use Transfer Project Standards to copy system families from one project to another.
The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.
The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall, and also a standalone
furniture family component.
In-place Families
In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place families only
within the current project, so they are useful for objects unique to that project; for example, custom wall treatments.
You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families, and the category that you use determines the
components appearance and display control within the project.
The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family.
In this exercise, you learn when to use the Family Editor, how to access it, and the general procedure for creating a
standard component family.
Creating Components in
the Family Editor
16
In this tutorial, you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families.
In each lesson, you learn how to create a different type of component. Using the
installed templates, you start with a simple door family and then move onto a
window family. You create a furniture family, a lighting fixture, and several
annotation families. In addition, you create an in-place family. When you create
an in-place family, you create it within the project file, not within the Family
Editor. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.
481
Creating 3D Geometry
All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. There are four different methods to create
Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion, Blend, Revolve, and Sweep.
Solids and Voids are sketch based. When you are in sketch mode, you can no longer select or modify an element that
is not in the sketch. To quit the sketch mode, click Finish Sketch on the Design bar.
Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. There
can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other.
Blend: A blend contains two sketches, Base and Top, both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection
between the sketch lines. Each sketch is set to a different height. The sketches must not touch or intersect each
other.
Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. The
start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. The sample below shows a start
angle of 0 and an end angle of 180.
Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open, and a Profile that must be a closed
loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile.
When a void is placed on a solid, it automatically cuts the solid. If you place the void before you add the solid, use the
Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool.
You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar:
Join Geometry
Unjoin Geometry
Cut Geometry
Dont Cut
6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center F/B, and on the Options Bar, click
7 In the Element Properties dialog, verify that Other Defines Origin is selected, and click OK.
8 Using the same method, verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center L/R reference plane, and click
OK.
The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in
plan view.
4 Click Modify.
You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views.
6 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data Name, enter Left, and click OK.
7 Using the same method, name the other reference planes Right, Front, and Back, as shown.
Definition
Not a Reference
Weak Reference
Strong Reference
Directional References
According to these rules, define the priorities of the reference planes you have created.
1 Select the Left reference plane, and on the Options Bar, click
2 In the Element Properties dialog, for Other Is Reference, select Left, and click OK.
3 Using the same method, specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane
(Right, Front, and Back).
Click the temporary dimension, enter 2' 5", and press ENTER.
Click OK.
Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string.
9 Using the same method, dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter.
15 Using the Element Properties dialog, name them Base Left, Base Right, Base Front, and Base Back.
Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments, you need to specify
the Is Reference values.
16 While pressing CTRL, click the base reference planes, and click
17 In the Element Properties dialog, for Other Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK.
Now the reference planes can be used in the family, but do not appear in the project. Position and dimension
the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes.
18 Click the Base Left reference plane, enter 2" for the left temporary dimension, and press ENTER.
19 Using the same method, position the remaining new reference planes.
22 Using the same method, dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes,
and lock the dimensions.
You can dimension reference planes in plan, elevation, and section views. Make sure that you use consistent
views to add dimensions. Next, you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the
Front view.
23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
The front view displays. By default, the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin
of the family in the elevation view.
24 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane.
Click OK.
29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 4' 8".
30 With the top reference plane still selected, click
Click OK.
35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane.
36 Click Modify.
37 Select the last dimension added; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
38 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
7 Click Apply.
Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values.
NOTE In the Family Types dialog, clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog; clicking OK
adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog.
8 Using the same method, create a new type named 3' 4" x 6' 8" x 6' 8".
9 In the Family Types dialog:
10 Click Apply.
11 Click OK.
Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for
existing geometry in a drawing. In that case, select the geometry, and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar.
Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode, there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to
Set Work Plane. This option will display the Work Plane dialog, where you can define the plane.
Creating Geometry
In this lesson, you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. You constrain the extrusions to the
reference planes you created in previous exercises.
Sketch an extrusion
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form Solid Extrusion.
3 On the Options Bar, click
(Align).
9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference, and click the top edge of the extrusion to align
to this reference plane.
10 Lock the dimension.
NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference
plane and lock it.
11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension.
15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes), and lock all
the sketch lines with the reference planes.
19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference, and click the top edge of the extrusion
to align to this reference plane.
The base should display only in elevation and 3D views.
20 Click Modify.
21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP, and click OK.
23 Save the file.
Creating 2D Geometry
You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. When you use 3D geometry, the software automatically creates the
correct plan, elevation, and section views of the family. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from
the Family tab of the Design Bar:
Model lines: these can be added in all views. For example, use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view
of the family.
Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan, elevation, and section views. They are view direction specific; they show
only in views that are parallel to their creation view.
For the furniture family, lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. By design, the lines need to
appear in medium and fine detail levels, but not in coarse.
Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 While pressing CTRL, select the base geometry and the furniture geometry.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate Hide Element.
Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the
intersections of the reference planes.
4 On the Design Bar, click Symbolic Lines.
5 On the Options Bar, verify that the Line tool is active.
6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner, and lock the geometry.
NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. Click Modify, select the symbolic line, and
click the locks to create the constraint.
7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner, and lock the geometry.
8 While pressing CTRL, select both lines and, on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, under Detail Levels, clear Coarse, and click OK.
The lines are greyed out, as the current displayed detail level is Coarse.
Save a 3D view
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D views, double-click View 1.
This opens a predefined 3D view.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
3 Click View menu Orient Northwest.
NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation
of your view, this view is maintained when the family is opened again.
Create a project
6 On the Standard toolbar, click
(3D).
You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width,
height, and thickness.
11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening, sketch a 3' 0'' x 0' 2'' rectangle
for the door leaf as shown.
NOTE In the image below, the color and weight of the symbolic lines have been enhanced for training purposes.
12 Select each of the Frame Projection dimensions and move the value out of the view as shown. To move a
dimension value, drag the blue control to a new location. You may need to zoom in on the dimension to
accomplish this.
Although this is not a necessary step, it reduces the clutter within the view.
15 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.
NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. (See the Exterior Elevation
view.) Because labelled dimensions are parameters, a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all
dimensions labelled with it change accordingly.
19 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.
20 On the Options Bar, select Thickness for Label.
TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar, click the down arrow
button, and select the command from the menu.
When drawing an arc from center and end points, you first specify the arc center, then you specify each
end point.
25 Enter SI, and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point.
26 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.
27 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint.
In the image below, the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the reference plane.
32 On the Options Bar, click
33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Exterior for the Name instance parameter,
and click OK.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry on page 504.
7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle, and then select the
lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle.
8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
9 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Left.
21 In the Element Properties dialog, select Panel for Subcategory, and click OK.
The solid geometry of the door is now complete.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, Assigning Materials to the Door Components on page 507.
for Texture.
for Material.
11 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Oak Door, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
for Material.
17 In the Materials dialog, select Oak Door for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.
The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material.
The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
28 Click OK.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Defining New Door Types on page 509
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
11 Click OK.
You now have three new door types defined within your door family.
12 On the File menu, click Save.
13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name, Training Door.rfa.
24 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
Click Apply.
Change the height and width values again, and click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to
the changing dimension values. This process is called flexing the model, and it is done to avoid conflicts
and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.
9 Enter 4' 0'' for Height and 8' 0'' for Width, and click Apply.
This is the starting point for the new window.
10 Click OK.
11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry on page 514.
5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending
at the lower right corner. Snap the cursor to each corner.
The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane.
14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 0' 2 1/4'' to the left of the exterior wall face as
shown.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the reference plane.
21 On the Options Bar, click
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Sash for the Name, and click OK.
25 Below the red dot, sketch the frame profile approximately as shown.
NOTE When you sketch the frame profile, the exact dimensions are not critical. However, the frame profile
should extend beyond the edges of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent
steps.
26 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
27 Select the right edge of the frame section, and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.
28 Select the left edge of the frame section, and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.
29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it
with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays, click it to lock the line to the reference plane.
35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot; this is the top of the window opening.
Next, select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.
The entire sash outline is selected, and lock icons display on each line.
Click
Click
8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 0' 1 1/2'' to the right, as shown.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter,
and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary.
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter,
and click OK.
NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project, you can
control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog.
23 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
24 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.
Click Apply.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. For example, make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion
remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.
27 Click Cancel.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry on page 526.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the
mullion centerline locations as shown.
NOTE When you draw each reference plane, the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.
5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference
plane below it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal
reference plane above it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
21 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Do not
be concerned with precise dimensions. However, it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the
horizontal edges of the sash. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash.
After you complete the sketch, notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.
22 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.
25 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion, and place it
above the dimension you placed in the previous steps.
26 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
27 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter> for Label.
28 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following parameters:
Select Type.
Click OK.
29 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as
shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:
Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps.
30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes.
Click Apply.
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters, and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. In this case, you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered,
evenly spaced, and aligned with the sash edge. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines, or undoing the same.
34 Click Cancel.
Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value.
41 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown, and
then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.
46 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
47 On the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label. Move the dimension value as shown.
48 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane
as shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:
Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
Click Apply.
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
56 Click Cancel.
58 Proceed to the next exercise, Assigning Materials to the Window Components on page 537.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
for Texture.
5 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine, Yellow/, select Stained, Dark, No Gloss,
and click OK.
6 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame, sash, and mullions
7 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
8 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
9 Select the window frame sweep, the sash, and the mullions.
TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions.
11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.
12 Under Materials and Finishes, click
for Material.
13 In the Materials dialog, select Pine Frame for Name, and click OK.
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Edit for Visibility.
15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, under View Specific Display, select Front/Back and When
cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits); clear the other view options.
16 Under Detail Levels, verify that Coarse, Medium, and Fine are selected, and click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The window frame, sash, mullions, and glass display their assigned materials.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, Defining New Window Types on page 540.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
The window height is doubled, but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions.
5 In the Family Types dialog, enter 4' 0'' for Height, and click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
You now have three new window types defined within your window family.
15 On the File menu, click Save.
16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name, Training
Window.rfa.
35 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. This completes the Creating
a Window Family lesson.
Subcategories: Solid geometry, model lines, and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. This
allows you to drive lineweights, line colors, line patterns, and materials of the subcategories. You can also switch
on/off selected subcategories in a project.
Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you
the correct plan, elevation, and section views of a family.
Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion, Solid
Blend, Solid Revolve, Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. For
example, the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame
edges in an elevation view of the family.
Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. Model lines are displayed in every view, where
symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have
been created.
Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. Basically, a parameter drives geometry in a
family. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. Instance parameter
means, that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter, where type parameters
drive the geometry for each family type. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family.
Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. A Family parameter
does only appear in the family itself, where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported
to ODBC.
Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the
Detail Levels Coarse, Medium and Fine.
Assigning material:
Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned.
By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project.
By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family.
By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in
the family.
Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework, you can use a parameter
with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No.
Coarse
Medium
Fine
Plan
Section
Elevation
Additionally, you should define different widths for each of the casements, and should account for instances when
either of the casements is toggled off.
A: Insertion depth
B: Frame depth
C: Frame width
D: Sash width
F: Wall offset
G: Left width
H: Right width
I: Width
M: Height
Outer sill:
2 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, select Defines Origin, and click OK.
3 Select the horizontal reference plane, and click
TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted; refer to the command line to verify what is selected.
4 In the Element Properties dialog:
Click OK.
5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane; in the Edit toolbar, click
11 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data Name, enter Wall Offset Left, and click OK.
12 Using the same method, name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right.
13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge; use the blue circle grip to drag the left
edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane.
By extending the reference pane, you can more easily select it because it doesnt overlap with other elements
in the drawing.
TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted; refer to the status bar to verify what is selected.
14 Using the same method, drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side.
The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left
and right edges of the wall offset for the opening.
19 Select the dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
20 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
This parameter is defined as an instance parameter, because each inserted value should have a different
insertion depth. Next, dimension the vertical reference planes.
Click OK.
27 Using the same method, dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes.
28 Select the dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Wall Offset.
The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. Next, you apply the same method to
reference planes in an elevation view.
34 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data Name, enter Wall Offset Top, and click OK.
35 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes.
37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane; for the temporary dimension, enter 4".
38 Select the dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
39 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
(Plane).
3 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, for Name, select Reference Plane : Sill, and
click OK.
4 On the Design Bar, click Void Form Void Extrusion.
5 On the Options Bar, click
NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes.
(Align).
7 Select the Exterior reference plane, select the top edge of the sketch, and lock the alignment.
8 Using the same method, lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge, Wall Offset Left, and Wall Offset
Right reference planes.
(Align).
13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane, and lock the alignment.
14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane, and lock the alignment.
15 Using the same method, align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and
Sill reference planes.
In order to use the voids as a new opening, you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. Also,
the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry.
16 On the Views toolbar, click
(3D).
17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut), and press DELETE.
(Cut Geometry).
Next, you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters.
Click OK.
Note that the opening has changed correctly. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and
thicknesses.
Click OK.
Click OK.
14 Select the right dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
16 Select the left dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Frame Width.
17 Using the same method, create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane, name
it Frame Interior, and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown.
18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.
The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important.
19 Using the same method used previously, name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right,
dimension the planes at 3", and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension.
NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise.
Click OK.
26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane; for the temporary dimension, enter 6".
27 Using the same method, create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane,
name it Frame Top, and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 6".
28 Select the lower dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
29 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
30 Select the other dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
Before you model the frame geometry, add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether
the parameters work correctly.
39 Click Apply.
Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions.
40 Under Name, select 6' 8" x 5' 0" 2-Swing Sash 4' 0", and click OK.
(Plane).
42 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, for Name, select Reference Plane : Frame Interior,
and click OK.
43 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form Solid Extrusion.
44 On the Options Bar, click
NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left, one on the right, and a third rectangle outside the intersection of
the reference planes.
(Align).
46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes, and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges
as shown.
NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes.
Rectangle position in view
Left
Right
(Align).
50 Align edges:
Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane, and lock the alignment.
Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane, and lock the alignment.
51 Click Modify.
52 On the Views toolbar, click
(3D).
56 Click OK twice.
57 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
The window frame is complete. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial.
4 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created, and click
Click OK.
6 Using the same method, specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes, working from left
to right:
Reference Plane
Properties
7 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown; specify
each dimension as 2".
8 Select the left dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
9 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
10 Select the next dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Sash Width.
11 Using the same method, add parameters to the remaining dimensions.
You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip.
Click OK.
19 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane; for the temporary dimension, enter 2".
20 Using the same method, create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane:
21 Select the Sash Top reference plane; for the temporary dimension, enter 2".
22 While pressing CTRL, select both dimensions; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Sash Width.
The skeleton of the window sash is complete. Before you model the sash geometry, extend the 2 window
types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly.
(Align).
31 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes, and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges
as shown.
NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes.
Rectangle position in view
Outside
Inside
Sash Top, Sash Bottom, Sash Right Left, Sash Right Right.
(Align).
38 Align edges:
Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane, and lock the alignment.
Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane, and lock the alignment.
39 Click Modify.
40 Using the same method, switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left
sash.
41 Switch back to the Ref. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash.
42 On the Views toolbar, click
(3D).
46 Click OK twice.
2 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics Visible, click the rectangular button on the right side.
3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, click Add parameter.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
5 Click OK 3 times.
6 Using the same method, create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left.
7 On the Design Bar, click Family Types; note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the
Value column.
Click OK.
10 For each of the new reference planes, create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. This
centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes.
(Plane).
2 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, for Name, select Reference Plane : Glass Axis,
and click OK.
3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form Solid Extrusion.
4 On the Options Bar, click
Click OK.
13 Using the same method, dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch, and create a Glass Height Right
parameter.
Assign properties
15 Select the glass geometry, and click
18 Click OK twice.
20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right.
21 On the Views toolbar, click
(3D).
22 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading With Edges.
Expression
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Exponentiation
Logarithm
log
Square Root
sqrt(Value)
Sine
sin
Cosine
cos
Tangent
tan
Arcsine
asin
Arccosine
acos
Arctangent
atan
e raised to an x power
exp
Absolute Value
abs
6 Select the dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Click OK.
NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. This would overconstrain the family. The width
of the right sash will be determined using formulas.
Click OK.
11 In the Family Types dialog, for Dimensions Width Sash Right Formula, enter the formula to get the
calculated width:
(Width - Width Sash Left) - (Frame Width * 2) - Center Post Width
12 Press ENTER.
The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width, Width Sash Left,
Frame Width, and Center Post Width. The value is greyed out, and cannot be changed in the Family Types
dialog.
Click Apply.
15 For Name, select 5' 0" x 4' 8" 2-Swing Sash 1' 4".
16 Adjust the parameters:
For Width Sash Left, enter 1' 4", and press ENTER.
The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously; the new value is 2' 10
3/4''.
Click Apply.
17 For Name, select 6' 8" x 5' 0" 2-Swing Sash 4' 0", and click OK.
Under Other, in the Formula row for Glass Length Right, enter if(Sash Right, (Width Sash Right
- 2 * Sash Width), Width Sash Right).
In the Formula row for Glass Length Left, enter if(Sash Left, (Width Sash Left - 2 * Sash Width),
Width Sash Left).
In the Formula row for Glass Height Right, enter if(Sash Right, (Height - Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom - 2 * Sash Width), Height - Frame Height Top - Frame Height
Bottom).
In the Formula row for Glass Height Left, enter if(Sash Left, (Height - Frame Height Top - Frame
Height Bottom - 2 * Sash Width), Height - Frame Height Top - Frame Height Bottom).
20 Click OK.
The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. You can test the
formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog.
(Plane).
6 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, for Name, select Reference Plane : Insertion
Edge, and click OK.
7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Symbolic Lines.
8 In the Type Selector, select Elevation Swing [projection].
9 On the Options Bar, clear Chain.
10 Create single symbolic lines as shown, and lock all alignment constraints.
11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select all symbolic lines, and on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, under Detail Levels, clear Coarse, and click OK.
13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side, and click
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Visible, select the rectangular button on the right
side.
15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Sash Right.
16 Click OK twice.
17 Using the same method, associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter.
18 Save the file.
6 In the Material Library dialog, expand accurender Solid Colors, and select Whites.
7 Select Cool,Matte, and click OK three times.
The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. Next, you create material parameters for
the frame, sash, and glass.
(3D).
3 In the Element Properties dialog, for Materials and Finishes Material, click the rectangular button on
the right side.
4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, click Add parameter.
5 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
9 Click OK.
10 Save the file.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Imperial/Families/Windows/i_Concrete
Sill.rfa, and click Open.
4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion, a Width type parameter, a Depth instance parameter,
and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the
origin of the family.
The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill, has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned, and
is visible only in detail level Fine.
8 Click OK.
The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill, has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned, and is
visible only in detail level Fine. Parameters, Reference Planes, and Origins are as in the concrete sill family.
13 Click OK.
Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family.
The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu Family Category and Parameters.
The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family.
Click OK.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Construction Sill Length, in the Formula column, enter Width
- 2* Wall Offset.
5 Click OK.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Dimensions Width, click the rectangular button on the right side.
8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Insertion Depth.
9 Click OK twice.
The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth
parameter of the window family.
The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views.
(Align).
11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family, select the hidden Center (Left/Right)
reference plan of the Sill family, and lock the alignment.
12 Using the same method, align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane
of the Window family, and lock the alignment.
13 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left.
14 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Fine.
15 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Align).
16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family, align the bottom edge of the sill family, and lock the
alignment.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Group parameter under, select Constraints, and select Instance.
16 Click OK twice.
4 Click OK.
(3D).
11 In the Element Properties dialog, for Constraints Sill Type, select Metal Sill, and click OK.
Note that the window sill has changed.
Click OK.
14 In the Schedule Properties dialog, add the fields Mark, Width, Height, and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields
list, and click OK.
Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table.
Finally, you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family, and specify
values for the furniture length and depth.
The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template; they represent the furniture
centerline axes.
8 Draw two vertical reference planes, one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline
reference plane as shown.
11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the
left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.
17 To the right of the dimension you just created, add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference
plane to the lower reference plane, as shown.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore, you should flex
the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.
Click Apply.
Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. When the solid geometry is snapped
to the reference planes, it will also adapt to the same changes.
32 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry on page 590.
3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle, and then select the
lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle.
NOTE In the image below, the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have
a lighter weight.
9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines, press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection
option, and click to select all four symbolic lines.
NOTE If the Ref. Level head is too close to the extrusion, select the level line and drag the head to the right until
it is out of the way.
The desktop extrusion extends 0' 4'' above the reference level.
14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 2' 6''.
15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop, press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in
the Status Bar, and select the bottom edge.
16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 0' 4'' thick.
19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Under Dimensions, enter 8' 0'' for Length, and click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry on page 594.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 On the Options Bar, click
4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane, and click to locate a new vertical reference plane
offset 0' 4'' to the right.
5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane, and click to locate a new horizontal reference
plane offset 0' 4'' below it.
8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Lock the dimension
as shown.
11 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Level: Ref. Level for Name, and click OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
13 On the Options Bar, click
14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify a point 1' 0'' to the right and 2' 4" down for the second corner of the rectangle, as shown.
A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.
23 For the align-to reference, select the horizontal reference plane second from the top, as shown below at
the cursor.
24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.
Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base, and then
click the lock icon to lock the dimension.
Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base, and then click
the lock icon to lock the dimension.
28 Add two final dimensions, one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base, as shown.
29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
Select Type.
Click OK.
32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.
33 On the Options Bar, select Drawer Base Width for Label.
34 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. However, notice that annotations display
in this view.
42 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
43 Click the Annotation Categories tab.
44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view, and click OK.
45 On the View Control Bar, click the Scale control and select 1/2''=1' 0''.
Under Dimensions, enter 8' 0'' for Length, and click Apply.
49 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
50 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry on page 603.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
4 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Center L\R for Name,
and click OK.
5 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
6 On the Options Bar, click
7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane, then move
the cursor up 1' 0" and to the left 1' 4", and click to specify the upper left corner, as shown.
9 Select the desk top, then the lower horizontal sketch line, and click the lock icon to lock the alignment.
10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion, then select the right parallel sketch line, and lock
the alignment.
TIP You may need to click the down arrow button, and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.
15 Select the left vertical sketch line, the upper sketch line, and then move the cursor down and to the right
until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of
the arc radius.
Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases
17 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base, select the left edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.
20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base, select the right edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.
Under Dimensions, enter 8' 0'' for Length, and click Apply.
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
25 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry on page 608.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical.
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer.
Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.
NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base
width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the
dimensions, zoom the view until you do.
, and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the
, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.
These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 0' 0 3/4'' for Extrusion End, and click OK.
19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
20 On the View toolbar, click
for Material.
for Texture.
27 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished.
28 Click OK.
29 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
Under Dimensions, enter 8' 0'' for Length, and click Apply.
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
35 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types on page 612.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6' 0'' for Length and 3' 6'' for Depth, and click Apply.
8 Under Family Types, click New.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Rolltop Desk 84'' x 38'' for Name, and click OK.
10 In the Family Types dialog, enter 7' 0'' for Length and 3' 2'' for Depth, click Apply, and click OK.
You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family.
11 On the File menu, click Save.
12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training
Furniture.rfa.
15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, click Load.
18 In the Open dialog, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open.
19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 60 x 36.
20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.
You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the
Creating a Furniture Family lesson.
Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.
The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at
the reference level, and the baluster has an assigned default height of 2' 6''. Top and bottom cut angles for
the baluster are also displayed.
15 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion.
16 Click the lock icon.
17 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa.
The new custom baluster is now complete.
16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster
for the Regular baluster.
17 Click OK.
18 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
19 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
20 Zoom in on the new balusters.
The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster
Family lesson.
5 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa.
The new sweep profile is now complete.
5 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa.
The new rail profile is now complete.
Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 On the File menu, click New Family.
2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile-Stair Nosing.rft.
The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.
Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.
5 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa.
The new stair nosing profile is now complete.
5 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa.
The new reveal profile is now complete.
Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 On the File menu, click New Family.
2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile-Hosted.rft.
The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference
plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.
5 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa.
The new host sweep profile is now complete.
21 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit.
22 Select the sweep profile again and on the Options Bar, click
24 Click OK.
25 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical.
5 Draw four walls as shown.
7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Wall Sweep.
8 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected.
9 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.
10 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.
Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library Load Family.
12 In the Open dialog, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
14 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click
The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.
This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.
The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.
21 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location.
22 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Ceiling Finish, and click OK.
23 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location.
24 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Area, and click OK.
Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template
1 On the File menu, click New Annotation Symbol.
2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Annotation.rft.
The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with
the template specify annotation parameters.
5 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.
8 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.
9 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.
10 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.
The titleblock has linework, text, and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style, graphics, and your
project data.
6 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner, and then specify the lower right
corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.
8 Move the cursor over the right inside border line, and click to draw a new vertical line.
, and click
12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown.
13 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select the second and third horizontal lines.
15 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project.
16 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
17 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
18 In the Type Selector, select Title Blocks.
19 On the Options Bar, click
20 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the
existing line.
21 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the
existing line.
22 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the
existing line.
16 Draw a text box below the initial text, and add an address and phone number as shown.
Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the last text note.
18 Select the drag handle, and drag the text note down as shown.
Consultant:
Address:
Address:
Telephone:
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the consultant text note.
23 On the Edit toolbar, click
26 Move the cursor down 4'' and click to specify the first copied text note position.
27 Move the cursor down another 4'' and click to specify the second copied text note location.
43 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Issue Date, and click OK.
44 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field, and click to specify the label location.
46 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Drawn By, and click OK.
47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field, and click to specify the label location.
48 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Checked By, and click OK.
62 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field, and click to specify the label
location.
64 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Name, and click OK.
65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field, and click to specify the label
location.
66 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Client Name, and click OK.
Click Modify, and select any labels that may need to be moved, so that they are all aligned.
79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock.rfa.
The titleblock graphics, text, and labels are now complete.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter Name for Drawn By, and click OK.
13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
16 Click OK.
Next, you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
12 In the Go To View dialog, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
The center wall section view is displayed.
Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form
13 On the Design Bar, click Axis.
14 On the Options Bar, click
15 Specify the lower end of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis, and then
specify the upper end for the endpoint of the axis as shown.
18 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center
point.
The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.
The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.
21 On the Options Bar, click
22 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.
23 Snap to reference plane intersections and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse
C as shown.
27 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.
The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.
30 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.
31 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.
35 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall, and then draw a vertical line
down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.
37 Select the interior face of the wall, and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment
to keep.
for Material.
40 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name, and click OK.
41 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
43 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
9 In the Go To View dialog, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis, and
then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.
15 Specify the intersection of the T.O. Footing level line and the axis, for the start point of the floor profile
as shown.
16 Drag the cursor up 2'-6'', and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.
17 Specify the intersection of level 1 and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.
18 Specify the intersection of the top of foundation reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next
point of the floor profile.
19 Specify the intersection of the top of foundation reference plane and the axis for the last point of the floor
profile.
for Material.
22 In the Materials dialog, select Cobblestone for Name, and click OK.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
25 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D Section View.
Description
Family template for baluster families.
Category: None
Baluster - Post
Category: None
Casework wall based
Category: Casework
Casework
Column
Description
Category: Columns
Curtain Wall Panel
Description
Family template for door elements of curtain walls.
Category: Doors
Electrical Equipment
Description
Category: Electrical Fixtures
Category: Entourage
Furniture System
Category: Furniture
Description
Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a
sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed
on ceiling in a project.
Description
Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a
reference line and left and right reference planes. Geometry can use
length parameter as stretch value. Includes the filled region tool.
Description
Family template to create any generic model geometry.
Description
Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample ceiling
geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face
in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering
tools.
Description
Family template to create massing families. Faces of masses can be
used to create other model elements like walls, slabs, and roofs
Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Masses can
report gross volume, gross surface area, and gross floor areas.
Description
Family template to create mechanical equipment families.
Category: Parking
Planting
Category: Planting
Plumbing Fixture wall based
Description
Family template to create 2D profiles. Profile usage (fascia, gutter,
mullion, slab edge, wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under
Settings menu Family Category and Parameters.
Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals.
Profile usage can be explicitly assigned.
Description
Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing.
Family template for models using the Real People Collection product
family. The family has an rpc file link included.
Category: Entourage
Site
Category: Site
Speciality Equipment wall based
Description
Spot Lighting Fixture floor based; Spot Lighting Fixture roof based;
Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based; Spot Lighting Fixture wall based;
Spot Lighting Fixture
Structural Column
If a structural column intersects a wall, the column cuts out the wall.
Beams can be placed on structural columns.
Description
Category: Windows
Description
Family template for windows.
Category: Windows
Description
Callout Head
Door Tag
Generic Annotation
Generic Tag
Family template for tags. The category can be set under Settings
menu Family Category and Parameters. Category: Generic Model
Tags
Grid Head
Level Head
Multi-Category Tag
Room Tag
Section Head
Description
View Title
Window Tag
Imperial
A - 11 x 8.5.rft
B - 17 x 11.rft
Comments
Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes. In a
project, the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View
menu New Sheet. In the Select a Titleblock dialog, all loaded
title block families are listed for selection.
C - 24 x 18.rft
D - 36 x 24.rft
E1 - 42 x 30.rft
Metric
A0 metric.rft
A1 metric.rft
A2 metric.rft
A3 metric.rft
A4 metric.rft
New Site Metric.rft
Parametric Component
Design Techniques
17
In this tutorial, you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.
During this tutorial, you learn the process and methodology of creating a new
family. In exercises that become increasingly complex, you learn specific
techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other
families in Revit Architecture 2008.
The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood
floor truss. In this case, the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and
grade of the truss chords. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance
to accommodate HVAC systems. The truss also has multiple types, formula-based
parameters, assigned subcatecories, and detail level controls. This type of
component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric
component creation, not specifically how to make a floor truss. At the end of this
669
tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component.
The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In this case, the beam design
must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require.
NOTE When creating a new family, you should avoid over-designing the component. If the design requirements
can be met with a simple design, then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. For
every complexity added to a family, there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project.
Take this into consideration during your design planning.
For instance:
You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Depending on the family you are designing,
the planning stage and questions may differ.
4 Continue with the next exercise, Selecting the Family Template on page 672.
Like most generic family templates, it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and
Center (front/back).
6 In the New dialog, scroll to the structural framing templates.
There are two structural framing templates provided.
This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping,
spacing, and display functions required by structural beams.
7 Select Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses.rft, and notice the preview.
Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template, it is not the best starting point for
the beam family.
8 Select Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview.
Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These
planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping
and display requirements of beam components. This template is the best starting point for the new family.
In this view, you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line.
This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Like many templates, the geometry
supplied can be used or discarded as needed.
13 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating the Component Skeleton on page 675.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.
The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam
component. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.
These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan
view display setting is coarse.
Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference
planes, it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.
In a later exercise, you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep.
8 Add a reference plane approximately 2" below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).
You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference
plane: Center (Front/Back).
12 Add a reference plane approximately 6" above the Level: Ref. Level.
TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. To do this, select the lower horizontal reference
plane, click
on the Edit toolbar, and select the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis.
These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. This beam requires additional
reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.
13 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
14 On the Options Bar, click
The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords.
15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below
it, click to place it.
TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend
to pick.
16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays
above it, click to place it as shown.
17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the right of it, click to place it as shown.
18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the left of it, click to place it as shown.
You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to
the next exercise, you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.
19 On the Options Bar, specify an Offset of 0' 8".
20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the left of it, click to place it as shown.
21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the right of it, click to place it as shown.
You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. In the following exercise,
you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton.
27 Click File menu Save.
28 In the Save As dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and
click Save.
NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. Make sure you remember where you saved it.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Dimensions and Constraints on page 681.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
This tool is the aligned dimension tool. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.
3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding
the dimension, separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.
11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane
and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.
13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference
plane, and place it below the dimension you added previously.
You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to
changes. Throughout the tutorial, you will add additional reference planes, dimensions, and constraints
as needed.
In the next exercise, you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. These parameters
are the key to providing flexibility within a project. In addition, they allow you to flex the model in
order to test your design.
16 Click File menu Save.
17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating New Length Parameters on page 685.
If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained, consider making it a type parameter.
If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible, consider making it an instance parameter.
If the component has material that varies per component, consider making the material parameter an instance
parameter.
If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature, consider making it a type parameter.
You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Select Type.
This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.
17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side
of the center chase as shown.
Nesting a component.
When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or
manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the
most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.
In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even
though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust
to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and
be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing
area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner.
or
Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family
Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.
Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog.
2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.
4 Enter 1' 6" for Depth, 0' 3" for Chord Thickness, 2' 6" for Center Chase Width, and click Apply.
Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.
Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or
modify the existing design in any way.
6 On the File menu, click Save.
7 Proceed to the next lesson, Adding Solid Geometry on page 693.
7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.
Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.
8 On the Tools toolbar, click
When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep.
9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.
12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown.
NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.
14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.
4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 20' 0" for Length, and click Apply.
Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension
references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference
planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length.
8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 10' 0" for Length, click Apply, and click OK.
11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.
In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project.
This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes
as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to
test how it works within a project environment.
TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards,
flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected.
14 Click OK.
In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays
and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.
Click Apply.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.
Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.
8 On the Tools toolbar, click
9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as
shown.
12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.
NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.
14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.
20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to
lock the alignment.
21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the
upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints.
25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown.
This will make subsequent work much easier.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view.
32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 1' 0" for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and
click OK.
41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper
horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.
55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper
horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.
56 On the Options Bar, enter 0' 0 3/4" for Offset.
57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.
Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends,
they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.
64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss.
65 On the Tools menu, click Align.
66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.
67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.
68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point.
69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.
70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side.
TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the
constraints to the reference planes.
71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\i_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_WWF1.rvt.
This project consists of foundation walls, a slab, a wood sill, and a wood rim joist. The rim joist was added
as a beam; therefore, the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Structural.
4 In the Type Selector, select i_Wood Floor Truss_1.
5 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is not selected.
6 Using point-to-point insertion, add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end.
NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. Try to make them approximately
equidistant as shown.
Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.
8 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square.
NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line, not the wall or rim joist. You do not need to be precise; you are merely
testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.
The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.
The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.
In the next lesson, you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes
in length.
11 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag.
This should return the project to its original dimension.
12 On the File menu, click Save as.
13 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.
IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. The project and family need to interact based on a
consistent file name.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\i_Wood_Web.rfa.
This family is a single extrusion as shown. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that
make it easier to array within the truss. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to
the host family.
Notice the model lines that surround the web component; they are visible only when you place the cursor
over the component. In the following steps, you align the web panel using these lines rather than the
extrusion edges.
Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. This will be accomplished in the next
exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.
14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown.
15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the
center chase as shown.
Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this
lesson.
NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members
will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In addition, it is
important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.
22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.
23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.
Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component.
Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.
Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
In the next exercise, you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to
maintain the web position as the truss changes depth, length, or the width of the center chase.
26 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
27 On the File menu, click Save As.
28 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family
there with its current name.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Formula-controlled Parameters on page 717.
Select Type.
Click OK.
4 In the Family Types dialog, under Constraints, enter Depth - (Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth
Formula.
TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field.
This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth.
NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. When you refer to another parameter within a formula, ensure you enter it
exactly as it is named.
5 Click OK.
9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebDepth, and click OK.
In the Type Properties dialog, notice that = displays within the WebHeight button.
10 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. In addition, notice the center
of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula.
After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web.
28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model
to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially
important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you dont multiply any existing problems.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
Select Constrain.
5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
Select Constrain.
12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components
to each other.
20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.
21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.
22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the
same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.
NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each
other when you change the depth of the truss.
Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to
lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The
primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length.
31 Zoom around the left side of the truss.
32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.
Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing
the parameter value.
NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in
this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any,
significant impact.
37 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss.
39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right.
40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify
it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced.
48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.
49 On the File menu, click Save.
50 Proceed to the next exercise, Reloading a Family into a Project on page 726.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.
In addition to the truss family, the project, i_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_WWF2.rvt.
In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In
addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.
5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field.
6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Pine for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
Notice the Wood - Pine material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.
When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are
assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood
material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control
over component visibility within a project.
8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.
19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for
Name, and click OK.
20 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK.
Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.
26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click
OK.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the
Materials dialog.
35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate.
36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK.
37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click
38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for
Name, and click OK.
39 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
41 Select the web extrusion.
42 On the Options Bar, click
43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and
click OK.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK.
Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.
12 On the Options Bar, click
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material
value field.
14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component.
17 On the Options Bar, click
28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click
the button that displays.
29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK.
30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.
Datasets
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_WWF3.rvt.
Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because
you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the
truss, all elements display at all times in all views.
Clear Left/Right.
Click OK.
Clear Left/Right.
Click OK.
Click OK.
Click OK.
26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.
27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.
TIP You can also use new types to flex the model.
741
Curtain Systems
18
Curtain systems are not walls, and they are not windows. Like walls, they can
define space and separate the exterior from the interior. They are typically not
load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like windows, they can usually
include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows, curtain systems are
usually assembled on site as a single unit.
A typical curtain system comprises a wall, panel, grid lines, and mullions, and
you can change these elements individually. This affects the entire curtain system.
For example, to resize the system, you need to change the length of the wall. To
switch panel types, you need to select a panel. To change grids, you select the
grid.
You can add curtain systems with the wall command, or you can use a specific
curtain system command.
743
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you create a curtain system using the wall command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as
a curtain wall.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Curtain_Walls.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Floor Plans, and double-click Ground Floor.
2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.
6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor, and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as
shown.
7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) 3D Views, and double-click Southeast Isometric.
9 Click View menu Orient Northeast.
10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.
(Properties).
Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base
constraint, top constraint, top and base attachments, and room bounding.
You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.
12 In the Element Properties dialog:
Click OK.
The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.
13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel; you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels,
using curtain grids.
24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 grid lines you just placed.
Next, you add a doorway to the curtain system. Instead of using the Door command, you set up a doorway
on a curtain panel, and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.
38 Using the same method, remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in
the previous step.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions.
43 Delete the dimensions.
44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays, click OK to leave the curtain grids
constrained.
You now have two 6-foot wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.
45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 4'0" above the ground floor.
46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.
You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.
47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to
indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 6-foot panels.
Use the following image as a guide.
TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. To get the horizontal grid
to display between the vertical grids, click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.
48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid), click in any white space to exit the editor.
Next, you replace the 2 larger 6-foot panels with curtain system doors.
49 Click File menu Load From Library Load Family.
50 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Doors\Curtain
Wall-Store Front-Dbl.rfa.
51 Select the left 6-foot panel. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you
are highlighting the panel.
52 On the Type Selector, click Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door.
The panel changes to a double door.
53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.
These panels schedule as doors, not as curtain panels. They are part of the curtain panel category.
55 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings
of the curtain wall doors.
Now, on the new curtain system you added, you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.
56 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Entrance Elevation.
57 On the View Control Bar, click
, and click Wireframe. This changes the graphics style of the view.
Changing panels
58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.
59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line.
62 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel.
The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the
depth of the panel, and Material specifies the shading and patterning.
63 Click OK twice.
64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.
65 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
The glazed panels display in blue, and the solid panels display in white.
68 On the File menu, click Save As. Name the file i_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.rvt.
This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.
Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them; however, there are a few that you do not want, so
you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary, because their width reduces
the size of the doors.
Removing mullions
8 Zoom in to the set of doors.
9 Delete the mullions below them.
Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins.
The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.
The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.
TIP After selecting the vertical mullion, you can also right-click, and click Join Conditions Break at Join to
break the mullion at both joins.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
15 In the Project Browser, double-click Southeast Isometric.
16 Save the file.
This completes the exercise for adding mullions.
This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system
and how to subdivide it with grids. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. Finally, you learned how
to add mullions and change their joins.
Dataset
Click OK.
8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.
The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Next, you place grids
on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. You are going to use one of these
snaps points.
11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the
midpoint.
13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters, eighths,
and then sixteenths.
14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East.
15 Zoom in to the cylinder, and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.
Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.
7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line
intersection.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK.
11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click
25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.
For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.
Click
(Polygon).
10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.
Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same
location.
, and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones.
40 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR.
41 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions On Gridline.
42 Press DELETE.
Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.
Dataset
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
6 Select the inside faces of the base walls.
TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the
inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.
Click OK.
Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.
Dataset
You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 8' 0".
6 Start the wall 4' 0" from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.
7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.
8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 34' 0", and press ENTER.
This specifies an exact length for the wall.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric.
11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.
The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid
layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.
12 Select the storefront wall, and click
The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the
Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same
parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number is the number of vertical
curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the
beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the
face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal
Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about
these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Architecture help.
15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern Angle, enter 45 and for
Horizontal Grid Pattern Angle, enter 15.
16 Click OK.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System Curtain System by Lines.
5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is
highlighted.
Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the
line if it does not immediately highlight.
Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system.
11 Click OK.
Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.
NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled
curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.
12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters,
and then eighths.
Roofs
19
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture
2008. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs
that you create.
773
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, and mansard roofs. In this
lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can
sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work
plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a
section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.
The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine
key points on the profile sketch.
7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.
TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the general
location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from
the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured
from (face, centerline, and so on), click the blue square on the witness line.
9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.
The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.
Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.
Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior
walls.
17 On the Tools toolbar, click
18 Select the edge of the roof, and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage
wall.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of
the house that joins the breezeway.
19 On the Tools toolbar, click
20 Select the breezeway roof edge, press TAB, and then select the exterior face of the wall.
The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof, so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section 1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.
24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 778.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to
define the roof gable ends.
To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch, you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt.
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
Because you are in a three-dimensional view, the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the
house and a notification dialog is displayed.
2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level, and click Yes.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.
10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
11 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click
The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope, and
click OK.
13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
14 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the
roof.
15 On the View toolbar, click
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 780.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define the roof
slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you
complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang.
NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls, press TAB, and then verify that a dashed green line displays
to the exterior side of the walls.
9 Using automatic snaps, sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the
lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.
11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 782.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed
green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.
Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The
sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.
6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
7 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and click
8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building, using the following
illustration for guidance.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
10 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
11 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical slope definition line, and then specify a point near
the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.
Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.
12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.
Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the
roof.
21 Click
to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.
22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold
CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.
Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join Roof
command to fix the roof.
24 Select the edge of the hip roof, and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 785.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then click to select
all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the
walls.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
9 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
10 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical roof line, and then select a point near the midpoint
of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you
want to keep.
11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.
20 Click
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 787.
8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.
Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.
11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.
13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow.
14 On the Options Bar, verify
is selected.
15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line:
Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of
the slope arrow tail.
Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify the location
of the slope arrow head.
NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, Aligning Roof Eaves on page 788.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
2 Select the gable roof over the garage.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit.
4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
6 With the two gable end lines selected, on the Options Bar, click
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 12'' for Rise/12", and click OK.
8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Align Eaves.
The eave lines display with a dimension. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch
plane.
9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one eave to use
to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.
10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the
eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Mansard Roof on page 789.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North.
Notice the model has four defined levels:
In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
3 Select the roof and, on the Options Bar, click
4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.
5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.
Next, create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
10 On the Options Bar, click
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 3'' for Rise/12", and click OK.
16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
17 On the View toolbar, click
18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Condominium.rvt.
1 Click File menu Load From Library Load Family.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs.
3 Press CTRL, select Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove.rfa, and click Open.
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Roof Fascia.
5 On the Options Bar, click
6 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
8 In the Name dialog, enter Built-up Fascia, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile, and
click OK twice.
10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.
12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.
Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium
building model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Roof Gutter.
2 On the Options Bar, click
8 In the Materials dialog, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.
11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Soffits on page 794.
Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium
building model that you used in the previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.
4 Select the roof.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Area Analysis
20
In this tutorial, you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial
relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two
schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You can edit the
rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for
each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Finally,
you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.
797
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Area.rvt.
NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. If you are using metric units, your values will be different.
Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings.
Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme, it is not necessary in this
exercise.
4 In the Room and Area Setting dialog, click the Room Calculations tab.
You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.
NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line, the system-computed height defaults to the level,
or 0.
At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.
You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations, as well as selecting whether
to have room volumes calculated automatically.
5 Click Cancel.
Click OK.
8 When the informational dialog displays, click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically.
When you select Yes in this dialog, area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of
the building model, forming a closed loop. If you select No, you must manually add these boundary lines.
9 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).
Expand Area Plans (Gross Building), and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Area.
NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing
areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. To modify the area, you must select one of the
reference lines, rather than the area tag. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print.
11 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag.
NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed
within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings.
Next, you create a new area plan for rentable space. You add and use area boundary lines to define the
office areas, common areas, and store area.
Click OK.
NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Although the rule for these lines
is to follow the inside face of the wall, if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height, the area
boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.
Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Expand Area Plans (Rentable), and notice
that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
15 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.
When you add area boundary lines, you can either draw them or pick them. When you pick the walls, you
can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. If you do
not select this option, the area boundary lines do not update automatically.
18 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.
Click OK.
Click OK.
30 Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add an area in the common space to the right of the double
doors hosted by the west exterior wall.
In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:
Click OK.
31 Add an area to the building model core, enter Core for Name, and select Major Vertical Penetration for
Area Type.
32 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3
and Tenant 4, and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right, and Tenant 4 in
the lower right.
Notice that within the two store areas, the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.
3 When the dialog displays, click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.
9 Click OK.
The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the
schedule.
Massing
21
You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential
design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You can
create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model
shell. At any time, you can pick massing faces and make building model elements
such as walls, floors, curtain systems, and roofs. After you make building elements,
you can specify the view to display massing elements, building elements, or both.
Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. If you
modify a massing face, you then need to update the building face.
In this tutorial, you create a new building model using the various massing tools
to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building
model, you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You then
modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see
how changes propagate throughout the project.
807
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Massing_Start.rvt.
Next, you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.
34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown, and click to select the line start point.
The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.
TIP If you do not see this option, click the arrow next to the drawing options, and click Arc passing through
three points from the menu.
37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.
38 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and delete the vertical construction line.
39 Select the arc and the horizontal line.
40 On the Edit toolbar, click
41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.
42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.
In this exercise, you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.
In the next exercise, you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.
Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Massing_Start.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 In the drawing area, select the mass.
5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted, and place the
first reference plane 50' to the right.
6 Place another reference plane 50' to the right of the first reference plane.
7 Using the same technique, place three more reference planes 50' apart from left to right, as shown.
When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow, you specify the intersection of the reference
planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. These reference planes act primarily as
sketching aids.
10 Enter SI for intersection snap, and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.
11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. When sketching each extrusion, snap the corners to the
intersections.
13 Under Constraints, enter 40'0" for Extrusion End, and 0 for Extrusion Start.
14 Click OK.
15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
16 On the View toolbar, click
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Massing\Box.rfa.
5 Click New and enter 225' x 30' x 60' for Name, and click OK.
6 Enter 225'0" for Width, 60'0" for Height, and 30'0" for Depth, and click Apply.
7 Click New and enter 150' x 15' x 35' for Name, and click OK.
8 Enter 150'0" for Width, 35'0" for Height, and 15'0" for Depth, and click Apply.
9 Click OK.
10 On the File menu, click Save As.
11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa.
In this exercise, you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Massing_In-place.rvt.
2 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
4 On the File menu, click Load from Library Load Family.
5 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open the Imperial\Families\Massing folder.
6 Open the Box-Training.rfa, Arc Dome.rfa, Semi Barrel Vault.rfa, and Triangle.rfa family files.
7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
8 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 225' x 30' x 60'.
9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown.
TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.
12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
14 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40'.
15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown.
18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
20 In the Type Selector, select Triangle: 50' x 150' x 35'.
21 On the Options Bar, select Rotate after placement.
22 Place the cursor in the drawing area, and click to place the mass.
23 On the Options Bar, enter 90 for Angle.
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
25 In the drawing area, select the triangle, and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle
as shown.
27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
29 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35'.
30 Place the box mass family as shown.
32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
33 On the View toolbar, click
Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. In the next exercise, you join
these mass elements.
In this exercise, you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. You also loaded
other existing mass families and added them to the building model.
Dataset
Join geometry
1 On the View toolbar, click
NOTE When you join geometry, the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected
mass element.
3 Select the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' mass element as shown.
4 Select the triangle, and then press ESC to see the result.
for Axis.
9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box, enter SM, and snap to the midpoint of the edge.
10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.
11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown.
TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.
Join geometry
13 On the View toolbar, click
15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' first, and then select the triangle.
16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.
17 Press ESC to see the result.
In this exercise, you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently
selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another
element.
Dataset
4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog, select Sloped (primary), clear Curved, and then click OK.
5 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property, and click OK twice.
16 On the View Control Bar, click
22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property, and click OK twice.
23 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Elevations, double-click North.
28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog, select Curved, clear Sloped, and click OK.
29 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.
You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. Because it is likely that your client
prefers the design option with curved shapes, you can make it the primary option.
33 On the Design Options toolbar, click
34 In the Design Options dialog, select Curved and, under Option, click Make Primary.
35 Close the warning that displays, and click Close.
36 On the File menu, click Save As and save the file as i_Massing_Design_Options.rvt.
In this exercise, you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options
to get different versions of the design.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Massing_Building_Components.rvt.
Creating walls
4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
5 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Exterior - Brick on CMU.
6 On the Options Bar, click
7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.
8 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
9 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
10 Select all the faces shown in red.
NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed, alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap, ignore the warning and
continue selecting wall faces.
11 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 5.
12 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
15 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
16 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.
You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. If desired, you can select the overlapping curtain
wall, and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping
geometry.
19 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 9.
20 On the View Control Bar, click
In this exercise, you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.
Dataset
Creating floors
5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.
6 On the Options Bar, click Floor Area Faces.
7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog, select all levels, and click OK.
In this exercise, you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. You
then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model.
Dataset
Creating roofs
2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face.
3 Select the top face of the left 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element as shown.
7 With the Roof by Face command still selected, select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector.
8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.
9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.
10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 Click the Model Categories tab, select Curtain Panels, Curtain Systems, and Walls, and then click OK.
Dataset
8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected, select the blended form on the in-place mass.
Dataset
13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.
The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps, you remake several of the
building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.
15 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.
TIP To select the curtain wall, press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls
: Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also, remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here;
you want to select the smaller one.
TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls, you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.
20 Select the roof as shown.
In this exercise, you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with
the new mass family.
In this exercise, you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.
This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired, you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components, such
as columns and an extruded roof, to the building shell. You might create the model shown.
Grouping
22
Using the grouping functionality in Revit Architecture 2008, you can create
reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By
grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the
modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance
of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new
instances that you place contain the modifications.
You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model
group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom
condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically
included in the host group.
Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other
team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different
project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also
gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the
library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and
then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office
can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive
units.
845
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt.
2 Enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.
(Group).
5 In the Create Model Group dialog, enter Typical Kitchen, and click OK.
The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.
13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.
(Mirror).
(Rotate).
19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.
You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original
orientation, one mirrored, and one rotated, as shown.
Modifying a Group
In this exercise, you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing, all instances of the same group
in the drawing are updated.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise, i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen, press TAB to highlight the wall, and click to select
it.
3 Click
This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.
4 Move the cursor over the door, press TAB, and click to select the door.
5 Click
6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall, press TAB, and click to select the wall.
7 Click
Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances
18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.
19 Select the Typical Kitchen group.
20 On the Options Bar, click Edit Group.
In edit group mode, the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow, and the group editor toolbar
initially displays in the upper left corner. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in
their object style. All other elements in the model are grayed out.
21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, select Opening Wall Opening.
22 In the drawing area, select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.
23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall, move the cursor up, and click near the top corner of the wall to
create an opening.
Nesting Groups
In this exercise, you add the Typical Kitchen group, created in an earlier lesson, and the wall and folding doors for the
closet, to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group, which acts
as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit, all instances of the host group are updated to contain
the nested group.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise, i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.
(Add to Group).
6 Press TAB, select the wall between the folding doors, and each of the bifold doors.
5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.
6 Move the cursor down and to the left, and select a point below the left elevator.
The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.
(Group).
15 In the Create Detail Group dialog, enter Elevator Lobby Tile, and click OK.
16 In the drawing area, select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.
17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft, as shown.
4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit, as shown:
(Filter Selection).
8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Door Tags, and click OK.
(Group).
10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog, for Attached Detail Group Name, enter 2
Bedroom Door Tags, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit, and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door
Tags is attached.
A warning dialog is displayed, explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new
project will be used.
Site
23
In this tutorial, you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify
site components within a project.
869
Creating a Toposurface
In this exercise, you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method, you create a toposurface
by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the second part of this exercise, you import contour data from
a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_First_Project.rvt
This project file was created using the default imperial template.
6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at
least three elevation points.
7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle should be
approximately 150' wide.
TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.
10 Repeat the previous step for 30' , 40' , 50' , and 60' absolute elevations. Try to add each circle concentrically
inside the previously created circle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
15 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
16 On the View toolbar, click
to delete it.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South.
Before importing the contour data, modify the level names and elevations.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head, click the elevation value, enter 3' 0" , and press ENTER.
21 Click the Level 2 text, rename the level Basement, and press ENTER.
22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views, click Yes.
23 Click the Level 1 text, rename the level Base Site Elevation, and press ENTER.
Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views.
24 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
25 On the File menu, click Import/Link CAD Formats.
26 In the Import/Link dialog:
Under Import or Link, clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers.
Click Open.
You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.
27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog, clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark, and click OK.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view.
29 Select the imported topography.
Until it is exploded, it is considered an import symbol.
30 On the Edit menu, click Pin Position.
This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.
When you select the import symbol, you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation
points.
38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog, clear C_INDX, and click OK.
This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you have not
completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site-in progress.rvt.
Click Modify.
Using the 3-point Arc tool, add an arc line on the right.
NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.
7 Move the cursor over the property lines and, when they highlight, select the lines.
8 On the Options Bar, select Edit Table.
A warning dialog is displayed, informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be
undone.
9 In the warning dialog, click OK.
10 In the Property Lines dialog, click OK.
NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your
sketch.
to delete them.
Notice that after you complete the last line, the distance that displayed under From last to first point now
displays Closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. If the gap is not closed, review your data
entry and make necessary corrections.
16 Click OK.
The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.
17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference, click to
place the property lines.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK.
11 Click OK.
The object style subcategory, Working Contour, displays on the topography only at the elevation you
specified.
12 On the File menu, click Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.
The next exercise requires a new dataset.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Topographic Subregions on page 882.
In this exercise, you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting to
distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.
In the next exercise, you create topographic subregions to define roads, parking areas, and islands.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Site.rvt.
TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles, use the trim tool to create
just one closed loop, and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. The horizontal rectangle is
approximately 24' wide; the vertical rectangle is approximately 64' wide.
Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. When you finish the sketch in a
later step, the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.
Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Asphalt. Although you can select each toposurface
region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one
element.
You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region.
WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 4".
NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface.
If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface
or split the toposurface.
38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule.
Notice that the schedule has been updated.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 889.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK.
A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and
the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to
match the toposurface.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter.
RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 992.
6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region.
7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit.
Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining
elevation points.
8 Select the topographic surface.
10 Press DELETE.
Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished,
and new.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.
13 Press DELETE.
19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
20 On the View toolbar, click
The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for
the red surface that you see in this view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
8 On the View toolbar, click
, and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space.
6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking
area.
NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.
7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned
and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.
TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.
, and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new
12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown
below.
13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.
NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown
in the previous illustration has been rendered.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag
Parking Tag: Boxed, and click Apply.
4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag Planting Tag: Boxed, click Apply, and
click OK.
5 On the View menu, click Hidden Line.
6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.
Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise, you use a parking schedule to
number the parking spaces.
NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.
7 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 900.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
13 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, number the first three spaces consecutively.
Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you place the
cursor in the parking schedule, the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know
which space you are numbering.
14 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, finish numbering the remaining spaces.
Structural
24
In this tutorial, you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create
a building model skeleton. You begin by adding the structural walls, columns,
and beams to Level 1. After completing level 1, you copy the entire structure and
use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. In
the final lesson, you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the
building model.
903
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Structural.rvt.
904 | Chapter 24
Structural
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Select Depth.
Click
Select Chain.
In the steps that follow, you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration.
7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain.
8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line, and click to specify the wall endpoint.
906 | Chapter 24
Structural
9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection, and click to specify the next wall endpoint.
10 Move the curser to the right, and click the next line intersection.
11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a
parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left, and click to complete the chain of walls.
14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.
Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins
grid C.
When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain, zoom in to ensure you select
the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.
908 | Chapter 24
Structural
Clear Chain.
Click
27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc.
Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the left extent of the arc.
Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the right extent of the arc.
Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees.
29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown.
30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.
910 | Chapter 24
Structural
34 Drag the lower horizontal wall downward until it is 5' 0" from grid C as shown.
36 On the Design Bar, click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar, clear Chain.
In the steps that follow, you create the final structural walls for the project. Both walls are 4' 0" long.
38 Draw the 4' 0" wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown.
912 | Chapter 24
Structural
Select
On the Options Bar, click Options to specify the wall pick options.
In the Auto Dimension Options dialog, select Intersecting Walls, and click OK.
5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall, and when it highlights, select it.
6 Move the cursor to the left, and click to place the dimension as shown.
11 Click the temporary dimension value, and enter 12' 0" for the distance between the wall centerline and
grid B.
914 | Chapter 24
Structural
916 | Chapter 24
Structural
Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.
13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.
14 If necessary, zoom out until you can see all the grids.
15 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
This completes this set of columns.
18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below, press the SPACEBAR to rotate them.
Columns B3-5 are shown below.
918 | Chapter 24
Structural
TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR, the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. Although
you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns, you could not have rotated them independently
of each other. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns
B1-5.
19 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select column A5 and delete it.
In this exercise, you used various methods to add structural columns, and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR.
In the next exercise, Adding Structural Beams and Girders on page 920, you add structural beams to the building
model.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
920 | Chapter 24
Structural
Column*
Brace
Horizontal
Brace
Girder
Girder
Brace
Horizontal
Bracing
Girder
Other
Horizontal
Bracing
Girder
Joist
Purlin
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
Horizontal
Bracing
Horizontal
Bracing
Horizontal
Bracing
Horizontal
Bracing
Other
Joist
Joist
Purlin
Other
Purlin
Purlin
Other
Purlin
Other
Purlin
Other
Structural
Purlin
Other
Joist
922 | Chapter 24
Joist
Other
16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column.
17 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model.
Notice beams are added between columns. In addition, notice that beams connect to the structural walls
that intersect grids.
Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain.
924 | Chapter 24
Structural
NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4, make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. You may
need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. You can also use the shortcut key, SI, to snap only to intersections.
The W12x26 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W12x14 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. If the
W12x14 beam had crossed grid A, it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first,
and the W12x26 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.
36 On the Options Bar, click Grid.
37 Select grid B.
38 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
926 | Chapter 24
Structural
46 Move the cursor to the right, enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints), and click the endpoint of the short
wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below.
55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall, and click when it intersects grid 2.
56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall, and click when it intersects grid 1.
Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.
928 | Chapter 24
Structural
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the web joist you added in the previous step.
7 Check the temporary dimension of the truss. It should be 20' 0" below grid B and 5' 0" above grid C. If it
is not, click the temporary dimension value to correct it.
930 | Chapter 24
Structural
Click
Select Constrain.
10 Click the intersection of the left extent of the web joist and grid 1 as shown to specify the array start point.
11 Move the cursor upward, enter 5, and press ENTER to specify a distance of 5' 0" between the arrayed web
joists.
, and zoom around the corner of the building where you added the web
932 | Chapter 24
Structural
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Structural, notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist.
This value was set automatically because when you created the beam, you selected the Automatic option.
According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson, any beam added between two girders becomes
a joist when the Automatic option is selected.
23 Click OK.
Click
26 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point.
27 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Once the direction
is set, enter 4 and press ENTER.
934 | Chapter 24
Structural
Notice that there is a joist overlapping the girder on grid 2, and a joist a very short distance to the left of
grid 3.
28 Delete both of these joists.
Add purlins
29 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
30 On the Options Bar, for Usage, select Automatic.
31 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the
next joist on the right as shown.
Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders, joists, and purlins. Their display
in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value.
NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight, style, and color within the Object Styles dialog.
33 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps.
34 On the Edit menu, click Array.
35 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Click
36 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point.
37 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right, and click.
936 | Chapter 24
Structural
43 In the Filter dialog, clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist), and
click OK.
44 On the Options Bar, click
45 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, change the following instance parameters:
Click OK.
46 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and notice the connection symbols display.
938 | Chapter 24
Structural
3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. You need at least
35 feet of space.
Click the level line starting point 10' 0 above the left extent of Level 2.
In the Project Browser, notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed.
7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown.
Each level is 10' 0 high.
940 | Chapter 24
Structural
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. Make sure the entire building model is included.
942 | Chapter 24
Structural
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
You can now view the new elevation, Elevation 1-a, in the Project Browser.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view.
Notice the stick framing representation. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set
to coarse. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view.
You are ready to add the structural braces.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
This project file is required, in its current state, to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.
In this exercise, you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces.
In the next exercise, Adding Structural Braces on page 944, you add c-channel bracing to the building model.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
944 | Chapter 24
Structural
4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4.
7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.
946 | Chapter 24
Structural
Click
Select Constrain.
12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point.
13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.
The braces are arrayed to Level 1.
14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Structural Framing Tags, and click OK.
948 | Chapter 24
Structural
Sharing Projects
25
When working with large building projects, architects commonly work in teams
with each person assigned to a specific functional area. This involves
simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the
same time, called Worksharing. In this tutorial, you learn how to use Worksharing
to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have
all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008.
You can enable Worksharing for any project. A workset is a collection of building
elements, such as walls, doors, floors, stairs, and so on. Only one user can edit
each workset at a given time. All other team members can view this workset;
however, they cannot make changes to it. This prevents possible conflicts within
the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that
someone else is actively working on, you can borrow that element without
requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset.
Using Worksharing, team members adding and changing elements in worksets
can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and
publish work to a central file whenever they choose. They can update their local
files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.
949
Overview
Sharing a project for the first time
To share a project, you must first enable Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project, a dialog
displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared, each building element in
the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element
within the property dialog for that element.
General Considerations:
Project size
Team size
You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature
correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will
maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project.
Project size
The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike AutoCAD
Xrefs, you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Instead, you should separate the
project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. In a multi-story
structure, you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor, such
as a tenant interior. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets,
you may want to create separate worksets for each portion.
Team size
You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You should
have at least one workset for each person, not including the Project Standards, Shared Levels and Grids, and View
worksets. In most projects, greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members.
Experience has shown that, for a typical project, the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each
team member.
Team member roles
Typically, designers work in teams, with each assigned a specific functional task. By subdividing the project based
on these task roles, each team member has control over a portion of the design. A typical scenario for a multi-story
commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles.
TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use, make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately.
Default workset visibility
After a project has been shared, a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. On this tab, you control
workset visibility on a per view basis. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear
in a view, you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. This allows Revit Architecture to display
the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should
be displayed.
When you create a new workset, you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in
each view. Regardless of the default setting, you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog.
Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Team size
usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. As new members
create worksets for their own use, the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default.
Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file, make any
required worksets editable, save to the central file, and then save the local file.
When working remotely, you work no differently then you would in the office. You can modify any
elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You can also
add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.
If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going
remote, you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In this situation, you will not be able to save your
changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those
changes back to the central file. In this instance, if you know who checked out the required workset, you
may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you choose
Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file,
you will not only lose the changes to that workset, you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets.
If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset, you can save
your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.
Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost, you should use it only
when:
You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file, or
You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If you have
a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file, you may want to request that someone
start a session of Revit Architecture, change the username to your name under Settings Options,
and make that workset editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the
remainder of your absence.
Remote rendering
4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender is supported, it is not recommended unless you understand
the implications for the rest of the team. If you intend to render the building model while away from the
office, you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. To do this, you should
check out the Materials workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any
materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.
In this conceptual exercise, you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You learned the basic steps of
project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.
In the next exercise, you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt.
Enable Worksharing
1 On the File menu, click Worksets.
A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. It also informs you
that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.
2 Click OK to accept the default workset name.
The Worksets dialog is displayed.
Families
Project Standards
Views
5 Scroll down the list of workset names, and notice all are editable by you.
When you enable worksharing, Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and
settings into the new worksets:
Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards
worksets.
Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. For example, Floor Plan Level 1 view moves
into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".
19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior
Shell.
20 Click OK.
21 Select one of the interior walls.
22 On the Options Bar, click
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and click OK.
24 Select all of the interior elements, including the interior doors, stairs, and walls.
The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper
left corner.
TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.
26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and click OK.
You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning
off the visibility of that workset.
27 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Worksets tab.
Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. This is because you
turned off Visible by default in all views when you created the workset.
29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.
30 Click OK.
The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If any interior elements remain,
select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.
37 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and click OK.
4 In the Opening Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
5 On the File menu, click Save As.
6 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
7 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected, and click OK.
8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1, and click Save.
You have created a local file which is for your use only. Next, you check out worksets so you can modify
the building model.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior
Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.
Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset, you can still edit this wall.
19 Under Constraints, select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line, and click OK.
Because this element is not owned by another user, Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your
changes. If it was owned by another user, a message would display and you would have the option to cancel
the change or make the element editable.
The upper exterior wall should still be selected.
20 On the Options Bar, click
Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset; however, the Edited by value is now assigned
to you.
21 Click OK.
22 On the File menu, click Worksets.
In the Worksets dialog, notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset, but you are listed as a
borrower of that workset. In this case, you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall.
23 Click OK.
All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you
place the cursor over any of the new elements, a tooltip, which matches the information in the Status Bar,
displays the workset as well as the element type.
When working in your local file, you should perform regular saves. It is recommended that you locally
save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours.
Borrowed Elements
User-created Worksets
37 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise, leave this
file open in its current state.
In this exercise, you created your local file, checked out worksets, and borrowed an element from a workset you did
not own. You modified the building model, and published your changes back to the central file where other team
members can see them.
User 1: Check out worksets, modify the building model, and publish changes
17 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open, open it now.
18 On the File menu, click Worksets.
Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.
19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes.
A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked
out by another user.
20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog.
21 Select the Interior Layout workset, and select Yes for Editable.
Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. If you only have one
workset checked out, it becomes the active workset.
22 Click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration, and move it to the left until it approaches
the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.
30 Using the following illustration as a guide, select the lower exterior wall, and move it upward approximately
2 meters.
A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. This is because windows
are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.
31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows.
32 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
33 In the Save to Central dialog, select Save the Local File after Save to Central.
34 Click OK.
When you save to central, you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the
building model. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.
35 Using the following illustration as a guide, delete the left window on the lower exterior wall, and move
the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.
47 In the Type Selector, choose any desk, and click inside any room.
A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.
This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created, the Visible by default option was not
selected. Therefore, the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the
active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture.
48 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
49 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Worksets tab, select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility,
and click OK.
51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays.
Borrowed Elements
User-created Worksets
67 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise,
leave this file open in its current state.
User-created Worksets
In this exercise, two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Each user checked out worksets, modified
the building model, and published their changes back to the central file.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively
working on.
If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial, Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users
on page 965, leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first
sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section, Checking out worksets.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central.rvt.
Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting
it from the Start menu.
24 Select the Exterior Shell workset, and select Yes for Editable.
You are now the owner of that workset.
25 Under Active Workset, select Exterior Shell, and then click OK.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.
32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by
modifying one of the temporary dimension values.
A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.
33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.
After you submit the request, a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.
At this point, you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element.
Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.
36 Click Grant.
37 Click Close.
User-created Worksets
26
In this tutorial, you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and
options within a single building model.
969
In the first exercise in this lesson, you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural
design option set. In the second exercise, you create two roof system design options that work with the structural
options. In the final exercise of this lesson, you learn how to manage and organize the design options, make your final
design decision, and delete the unwanted options from the project. These three exercises are designed to be completed
sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Urban_House.rvt.
Constrain
Copy
Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to
be copied, and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to.
In this case, the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. By
selecting Multiple, you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first
click). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.
13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.
14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Because it is important that you select the same
location on the notches you copy to, make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. In the following
illustration, the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.
TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction, and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.
Zoom in on the upper-left column, and click at its center to set the beam start point.
Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.
Zoom in on the upper right column, and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. In it, two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the
location of the start and end points of the beam.
Constrain
Copy
Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch, and click the center point.
This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.
28 Zoom out, move down to the next set of columns, zoom into the left column, and select the center of the
column to add a copy.
29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.
Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof.
Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.
41 Under Option Set, click New.
42 Select Option Set 1 and, under Option Set, click Rename.
43 In the Rename dialog, enter Roofing for New, and click OK.
44 Select the option set Roofing and, under Option, click New.
There should now be two roofing design options.
45 Under Roofing, select Option 1 (primary).
46 Under Option, click Rename, name the option Louvers, and click OK.
60 After aligning the beam, click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.
61 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Select Constrain
Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents
the move end point.
64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click
to indicate the end point of the move.
Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.
Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.
the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With the second option, you
created a unique in-place family as the structural system.
In the next exercise, you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter 38' 6" for Length, and click OK.
The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.
Select Constrain.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart.
17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam; click in the center
of the intersection to specify the array start point.
18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 3' 3" , and
press ENTER.
TIP When entering a dimension value, you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. For example, rather
than entering 3' 3", you can enter 3 3. The space separates feet and inches.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the louver you just placed.
23 On the Options Bar, click
24 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length, and click OK.
The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.
25 With the louver still selected, click the Edit menu, and click Array.
26 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Select Constrain.
27 For the array starting point, click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.
28 Move the cursor vertically downward, and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 1, and press Enter.
Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart.
36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Extrusion.
37 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name, and click OK.
The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the dataset specifically for this purpose and is hidden
in all views.
38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK.
Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it, you only need to sketch a single line or a string
of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. In this case, you must create a draped canvas sunscreen.
Therefore, the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.
39 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
40 On the Options Bar, click
This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. The first two points define the ends of the
line, and the third point defines the arc.
41 Select the top of the left column, the top of the next column on the right, and then adjust the dip of the
arc until it is 60 degrees. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value
immediately after you create the line.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs, try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible, then you can modify
it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You will fix this
in a later step.
43 On the Design Bar, click Properties.
44 In the Element Properties dialog, specify the following:
45 Click OK.
The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect
to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
46 On the Tools menu, click Trim/Extend.
47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc, then the center arc.
4 In the Project Browser, right-click the 3D View Primary Option, and click Duplicate. Repeat this step two
more times until you have three copies of the view.
5 Right-click each of the copies, and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows:
Secondary Option
Tertiary Option
Last Option
6 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option.
7 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and
louver) are visible.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Secondary Option.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Tertiary Option.
15 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option, and click
OK.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Last Option.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option, and click
OK.
At this point, all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the
client.
In this case, the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with
the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options, the beam and the louver roofing
should be selected as primary.
22 On the Tools menu, click Design Options Design Options.
23 In the Design Options dialog, under Structure, select Beam.
24 Under Option, select Make Primary. This was the client choice for structural.
Because the client has selected the design option, the current primaries are no longer options; but should
be accepted as part of the building model.
25 Select Structure.
26 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary.
An alert is displayed, asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this
option set and remove the option set.
27 In the alert dialog, click Yes.
The set is deleted, the beam option becomes part of the model, and you get a dialog asking if you want to
delete dedicated option views.
28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete to remove the views that used options, since you
no longer need them.
29 Select Roofing.
30 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model, delete the other design option
geometry and any dedicated option views.
31 In the alert dialog, click Yes.
32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete.
33 In the Design Options dialog, click Close.
34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option. The other options were removed
along with any dedicated option views.
The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model.
Project Phasing
27
In any project, you or the client may want to view the model according to phases.
Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can
create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific
phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information
into views and schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project
documentation, complete with schedules. For the client, you can create a visual
time line of phase-specific 3D views.
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that
requires renovation. You create new phases, demolish existing construction, and
then add new building model elements. In the second exercise, you apply
phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.
991
Using Phasing
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new
phases, demolish existing walls and doors, then add new walls and doors in a different location. This changes room
definition and total building model area.
In the second exercise, you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences
in the phase-specific room schedules.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Phasing.rvt.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the
goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to the Settings menu,
click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
When you create a new project, two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. As you add
new elements to the building model, they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This
phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties.
You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. If
you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file, then new building
model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.
2 On the View menu, click View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New
Construction is selected for Phase.
This means that all building model elements, regardless of phase, are visible in this view. Any new elements
that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Select any of the exterior walls.
6 On the Options Bar, click
In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created,
and None is selected for Phase Demolished.
7 Click Cancel.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
After you release the mouse button, all of the building model elements, including the door tags, are
highlighted in red. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.
10 On the Options Bar, click
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase
and phase filter settings in the view properties.
Because this is a renovation project, it requires a plan view for demolition and new construction. After you
create the views, you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.
27 Click New.
A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.
28 Under Filter Name, click Filter 1, and enter Composite Plan.
29 For Composite Plan, under New, select Overridden.
This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New, Existing,
Demolished, and Temporary.
Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. That is
because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host, you demolish all elements hosted
by it.
34 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Existing.
Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show
All.
All elements are displayed in this view, regardless of phase, because the phase filter is set to Show All. You
could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.
58 If necessary, spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls, which are displayed as red.
Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.rvt.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the
goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to the Settings menu,
click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase,
yet they have different room numbers.
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Demo.
15 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Tag.
16 Using the following illustration as a guide, add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior
wall. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.
Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new
construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. In this case, both views are assigned
the same phase yet have different phase filters.
Notice that in each phase-specific schedule, room information differs based upon the phase of the view
the tags are in. In addition, notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original
building model. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space
than the original.
In this exercise, you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. You also opened two
schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.
28
Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared
coordinates:
In this tutorial, you link several building models within a single project file in
which only a site plan has been developed. You position the building models on
the site plan, modify their visibility, and manage the links throughout the project.
In the final lesson, you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember
their location within the host project.
1001
Center-to-Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the
model.
NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes
as the footprint of your model changes.
Origin-to-Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit
Architecture model.
By shared coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates, this option
will place the link at a predefined location.
RELATED See the lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 1019.
Cursor at origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system; however, this system is not exposed
to the user.
Cursor at base point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This option is grayed out.
Cursor at center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Because training files are used in multiple
tutorials and are normally installed as read-only, you need to copy the three training files to a different
directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer, you can do
so. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site, c_Townhouse,
c_Condo_Complex. Otherwise, use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Site.rvt.
4 On the File menu, click Save As, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step, and save
the file there.
5 On the File menu, click Close.
6 Repeat the previous four steps for the following files:
c_Townhouse
c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder, select the three files, right-click, and click Properties.
8 Clear Read-only, and click OK.
All three files now reside, with write permission, in the Model Linking folder that you created.
Select c_Site.
Click Open.
10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.
13 Click Open.
The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.
After you select it, Linked Autodesk Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.rvt is displayed in the Type Selector.
Standard move commands work with linked building models. The linked model moves as one object,
similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.
15 On the Edit toolbar, click
The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click
specifies the move endpoint.
16 For the move start point, click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.
17 For the move endpoint, click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.
After you specify the location to move to, the linked file is displayed within the confines of the blue detail
lines.
21 Click Open.
The townhouse building model is displayed above the site model.
To rotate an object, you first specify the rotation start point, and then click to specify the end of the rotation.
In this case, the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and, when the vertical line displays, click to specify the
rotation start point.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise, and click to specify the end of the rotation.
This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of
the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.
27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.
The Copy command works much like the Move command. The first click specifies the start point, and the
second click specifies the copy-to point.
30 For the starting point, select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.
31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.
A copy of the townhouse is displayed on the right side of the site project.
32 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
NOTE After you rotate the townhouse, if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines, use the Move
command to make any adjustments.
33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.
34 On the Options Bar, click
35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity data, for Name, enter Townhouse A, and click OK.
36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.
37 On the View toolbar, click
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have
not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
2 Using the Dynamic View tool, hold the Shift key down and spin the model until it resembles the following
illustration.
Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. This is
apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.
3 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
In the steps that follow, you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project.
When using the Align command, you first select the plane you want to align to, and then select the plane
that you want to align. In this case, you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.
7 On the Tools toolbar, click
8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project, move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse
project, and click to select it.
TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project, press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the
status bar, and click to select the line. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site
project and not to the linked condo complex project.
Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays
for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the
model.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining
townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.
14 Using the Dynamic View tool, hold the Shift key down and spin the model until it resembles the following
illustration.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still are displayed in the
remaining elevation views.
12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.
Apply halftone
13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab.
16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model.
17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK.
Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the
entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply
halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses are displayed in halftone.
By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view
range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where
you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height.
In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground
Floor of the original linked file.
29 Select By linked view for View range.
Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New
Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter.
This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show
All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished,
and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components
are grayed out.
30 Click OK.
31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK.
32 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this
view.
In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines
and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the
building model at the same height as the other linked building model.
In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.
TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location.
Linking building models with Worksharing enabled
In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should
consider the following:
Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify
which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Add Link dialog, under Open Worksets, select
Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened
and drawn.
Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked
files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this,
go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional
worksets you need opened.
Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled
building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host
project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked
files.
Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must
keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the
link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed
in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you
should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the
host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not
to open that workset, the link is not loaded.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload.
NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by
right-clicking the link in the Project Browser.
Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.
NOTE This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 1003, and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK.
On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for
you to select another link.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate
system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared.
4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked
models, a dialog is displayed telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose
which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation.
5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates.
This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile
coordinates once.
14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to.
Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link
already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that
location.
15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as.
Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location.
16 Click Change.
17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK.
19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK.
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Save locations
21 On the File menu, click Manage Links.
22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.
23 Click Save Locations.
24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location,
you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there.
NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted
to save the locations to the linked files.
25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved checkbox for the townhouse project is no
longer checked.
26 Click OK.
27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release
the mouse button, a warning is displayed.
You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location.
You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action.
28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B.
You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you
relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are
moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates.
Relocate a project
29 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom to Fit.
30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation Relocate this Project.
This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move
endpoint.
31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.
32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are
offset the distance that you moved the origin.
33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position.
34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
36 On the File menu, click Close.
NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked
files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture.
In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the
host project with respect to the linked projects.
active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link
them in and have them retain their correct position.
In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Dataset
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project
file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file.
2 On the File menu, click Import/Link Revit.
3 In the Add Link dialog:
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Select c_Condo_Complex.
Click Open.
Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project.
4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The
current active location is Lot A.
Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the
townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.
In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.
Manage locations
1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations.
2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate.
3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK.
Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can
select Lot C if necessary.
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Comments
Cost
8 Click OK.
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project, you can sort the schedule data and
display a single table entry per door type.
12 Select Grand totals, clear Itemize every instance, and then click OK twice.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type, the schedule lists the total count for each
door type, and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
In this exercise, you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You also sorted the
schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.
You have completed this tutorial.
Customizing Project
Settings and Templates
1031
29
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2008 working
environment. In the first lesson, you modify the system environment, which is
independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify project
settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within
that project. Finally, you create an office template, and set it as your default
template.
1033
15 Click OK.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
17 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.
Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.
21 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars.
Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. This setting controls
only the tooltips that display within the drawing area.
22 On the File menu, click Close.
23 When prompted to save, click No.
24 On the File menu, click Open.
25 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Settings.rvt.
Notice that the system settings apply to this project.
26 On the Settings menu, click Options.
27 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab and make the following changes:
Under Notifications, select your preferred Save Reminder interval, and select Normal for Tooltip
Assistance.
Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name displays by
default.
Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals
older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Journal files
are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. These files are used
primarily in the software support process. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate
lost steps or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session.
29 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you
place the cursor over any building component.
30 On the File menu, click Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.
When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit Architecture file, you can click on the library folder
located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons
in the left pane of the dialog.
11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library.
12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click the icon that displays on the right side of the field.
13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit
Architecture projects, templates, or families, and click OK.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.
The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.
14 Under Library Name, click My Library.
15 Click
6 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4; and
enter 1 ;.
7 Under Object Snaps, notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you
commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts to the system default
settings.
8 In the Snaps dialog, click OK.
9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
10 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the cursor to the right.
Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4 increments. If it does not, zoom out until it does so.
A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. This
dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries.
TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching, you can also use
the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.
11 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1.
This is the increment that you added previously.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact length of
the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
13 Click to set the wall endpoint.
14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end
point.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the command
is only active for one click of the mouse.
18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the
exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Settings.rvt.
to select a texture.
6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\, select Stone04, and under Name, select Normal.
7 In the Material Library dialog, on the Material menu, click New Use Current Material as Template.
8 In the Material Editor dialog, click the Maps tab.
9 Select the entry under Image Mapping, and click Edit.
10 In the Image Mapping dialog, click the Orientation tab.
11 Under Offset, enter 0.75 for X and Y, and click OK.
By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map, you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns
within the rendering.
12 In the Material Editor dialog, click OK.
13 In the Save Material As dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone for the name, select user from the list of
libraries, and click OK.
The AccuRender texture Masonry - Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library.
14 In the Material Library dialog, click OK.
Before closing the Materials dialog, notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. In the next exercise, you
create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.
15 Click OK.
24 In the Materials dialog, select Masonry - Fieldstone for Name, and click OK.
This is the material you created previously.
25 Click OK three times.
The lower wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it.
26 Select the left exterior wall.
27 Press CTRL, and select the rear exterior wall.
28 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.
All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.
30 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.
Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick, and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. This
is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. In the following
exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 1045, you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to
this material.
31 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Region Raytrace.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Rendering.
32 In the drawing area, drag a rectangle around the 3D image.
After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model and select the scene, the rendering process begins.
When finished, the fieldstone material that you created is displayed.
TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail, click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.
Zoom into the model, select Region Raytrace, and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render.
Notice the roof did not render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. In the exercise,
Controlling Object Styles on page 1046, you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.
33 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Display Model.
34 On the File menu, click Save As.
35 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as i_Settings-in progress.rvt.
36 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 1045.
In the Materials dialog, notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.
19 Under Surface Pattern, click
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
27 On the File menu, click Save.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Object Styles on page 1046.
For example, there are often multiple window types within a project. The client may not be certain of the exact window
frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Rather than continually modify the type properties
of each window type, you can set the window frame material to By Category. You can then change the material in
the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, i_Settings-in progress.rvt.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three windows
facing you.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
4 Select one of the rectangular windows.
5 On the Options Bar, click
8 In the Materials dialog, click By Category (located under the Name list).
This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
11 Select the arched window.
12 On the Options Bar, click
25 In the Material Library dialog, expand Solid Colors, and select Reds and Oranges.
26 Under Name, select Indian,Dark,Glossy, and click OK.
27 Under Surface Pattern, click the Color value, select a red color, and click OK.
28 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
29 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.
6 Click OK twice.
You have created a new line pattern; now you must apply it. There are two ways to apply the line style to
the roof. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view, or
you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
8 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
10 Select Red for Line Color, and select Roof Line for Line Pattern.
11 Click OK.
The line style is applied to the roof in the view.
NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera
view where you expect to see a solid line. Plans, sections, elevations, and orthogonal 3D views show line color
and pattern.
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Roof.
17 Select Black for Line Color, and select Solid for Line Pattern.
18 Click OK.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 Click the Model Categories tab, and select Roofs for Visibility.
21 Click Override for Projection/Surface Lines.
This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.
22 In the Line Graphics dialog, specify the following options:
23 Click OK twice.
29 Click OK.
30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
31 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
32 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Click
Click
NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view, use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting
tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created, as if they are placed on an
overlay of the view.
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You
also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window
type.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, i_Settings-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
9 In the Type Selector, select Linear - Imperial, and place a dimension on the floor plan.
10 On the Standard toolbar, click
Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged, and that the tags display the window type rather
than the window instance number.
13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.
14 On the Options Bar, click
15 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.
The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. In the steps that follow, you load a
new window tag that displays the window instance mark.
16 Click Cancel.
35 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level
Options on page 1055.
Notice the 1/4" = 1 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. Any new view created using this scale is
automatically assigned the detail level Medium.
12 Click OK.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 1056.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Project_Browser.rvt.
Completed Project-Structure
Completed Project
10 In the Project Browser, expand each view type, and notice that each is grouped by discipline.
19 Click OK.
20 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization, and
click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, under Views, expand Complete, expand 3D Views, and expand both Architectural
and Structural.
Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase, View
Type (Family and Type), and Discipline.
22 On the File menu, click Close.
If you want to save this file, navigate to your preferred directory, enter a unique file name, and click OK.
Proceed to the next lesson, Creating an Office Template on page 1058.
In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the settings
that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. By saving
these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent standards and reduce the
amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.
9 In the Project Browser, navigate throughout the various views and schedules.
Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. Other templates, such
as the structural template, are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules, but the view properties
have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools.
10 On the File menu, click Close.
If you have additional projects open, close them.
11 On the File menu, click New Project.
12 Under Template File, click Browse.
13 Select the default template.
TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the
default, you can select it now.
14 Click Open.
15 Under Create New, select Project Template, and click OK.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Settings on page 1059.
Materials
Fill patterns
Object styles
Annotations
Project units
Temporary dimensions
Detail levels
In addition to the list above, there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that
can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt
the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson, Modifying System
Settings on page 1034 or refer to the Help documentation.
If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template, you can do so by going to
the Material menu and selecting New. Choose the appropriate option, and create the AccuRender material.
RELATED See Modifying System Settings on page 1034 for more information on creating new AccuRender
materials.
When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template, be aware that access
to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You may want to save the material to a
library located on a network path.
4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs.
The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. You can add and
delete view scales.
In the dialog, there are three tabs: one for model component line styles, one for perspective model line
styles, and one for annotation symbol line styles.
The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components, such as walls and windows
in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. You can define the widths of
16 different pens for six different drawing scales.
The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective
views.
The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols, such as section lines and
dimension lines. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale.
21 Click the Model Line Weights tab.
22 Modify existing line weights as needed.
23 Add and delete view scales as needed.
24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab.
25 Modify existing line weights as needed.
26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab.
27 Modify existing line weights as needed.
28 Click OK.
Modify arrowheads
34 On the Settings menu, click Annotations Arrowheads.
The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes, tags, and dimensions.
35 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.
37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead.
38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify the properties.
39 Click OK.
44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify the properties.
45 Click OK.
46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions.
NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. To move the view scales, click the arrows between columns.
The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.
64 Click OK.
Associated Tutorial
Considerations
Project Parameters
Phases
View Templates
Render Scene
Settings Menu
Command
Site Settings
Associated Tutorial
Considerations
74 Proceed to the next exercise, Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 1064.
Use the instructions in the table below to load, create, or modify a door.
Goal:
Steps:
In the Element Properties dialog, select Load. Navigate to the directory containing the
door type. Select it, and click Open.
In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Make modifications, and click OK.
In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Enter Name, and
click OK. Modify type properties, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this
tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.
6 On the File menu, click Load from Library.
Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Loading from the library is the
quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Press ESC twice to return to the template.
Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.
8 Expand Annotation Symbols.
Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template
you started with.)
9 Expand the titleblock, and select the titleblock type.
11 Click Preview.
This titleblock is currently part of the template. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. You
may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.
To load a titleblock, click Load. For more information, see Creating a Titleblock Family on page 630.
12 Click OK.
You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. To do so, right-click the
component, and click Delete.
13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component families or
groups as necessary.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Views and View Templates on page 1066.
Create 3D views
28 To add 3D views to the template, click
You can use this tool, Dynamically Modify View, to orient and save the view.
34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog.
35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target.
40 Click OK.
41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.
46 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Render Scene Settings on page 1069.
Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky, and changes the color automatically depending on the
sun and sky conditions.
Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering.
2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors.
3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors.
Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Choose from bitmap, tiff, jpeg, or targa.
Background images are available from the AccuRender software, which is included on the Revit
Architecture CD. Be sure that you have installed this software; if not, you can install AccuRender by
running the install program on the Revit Architecture CD.
Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information),
if one exists.
Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. This
works on opaque faces only. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Back face culling decreases
rendering time and space; however, the quality also is lower.
Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This
setting is effective for region raytraces.
Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft, Medium, Good, Better,
Best.
Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the
solution. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts, such as jaggy shadows or light
leaks, but also increases the solution time.
Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. This value
is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any
subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar.
Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Higher values
cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface.
Meaningful values are between 0 and 1.
Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft, Medium, Good,
Better, Best.
Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better
resolve the value of the pixel. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Draft
provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Best is the slowest, but provides the highest quality.
Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Shadows based on the size of the light
source are calculated.
Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass.
Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. This is
a very time consuming operation but, when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft
shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts.
The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names
that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to
American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer names are stored in a text file (either
exportlayers.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn.txt for MicroStation), and then are exported along with your
project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit
Architecture program installation directory.
TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Layer name
corresponds to level name for MicroStation.
2 For each category, specify the following:
3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category.
When scheduling, you normally schedule a single category: rooms, doors, windows, and so on. When you create a
multi-category schedule, it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter.
In this exercise, detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. If you are unfamiliar
with shared parameters, project parameters, and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules, see Scheduling
Shared Parameters on page 196or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 179. If you do not need
to make changes to shared or project parameters, you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this
lesson, Creating Named Print Settings on page 1073.
26 Click OK.
27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter, the group the
parameter belongs to, and assign which categories this parameter applies to.
28 Click OK.
29 Add shared project parameters as needed, and click OK when finished.